Home
        Hitachi CP-X2511N + DT01001
         Contents
1.                                                                                  BUSB TYPEA  USB TYPE B 9 9    USB A type jack 0000 USB B type jack      Data                   4       CONTROL   D sub 9pin plug     About the details of RS 232C communication   please refer to the following page        Pin Signal Pin Signal          1   No connection  4   No connection     3  TD 6    No connection       LAN    RJ 45 jack 00000000                         To input component video signal to COMPUTER IN ports    ex          D sub plug                         ES                                        Bd  bd Bd Ba  Bg  pH                                                                                                                    usa   Le CH CEDO oenn   mi    wie   aid e      OO RCA connectors    Y     Ce PB CRIPR  COMPONENT VIDEO OUT                                  O9  000008 a  09 929 w amp     f    9       O B   E                                                                                                                                        VCR DVD player    To input component video signal to the COMPUTER IN1 or IN2 port of the  projector  use a RCA to D sub cable or adapter    For about the pin description of the required cable or adapter  refer to the  descriptions about COMPUTER IN1 and IN2 port  G13      To input SCART RGB signal                                                                                                                                           
2.                                                                         CRC Action Type Type  COMPUTER IN1   BE EF   03   06 00   FA 38   01 00   2036   00 00  COMPUTERIN2   BE EF   03   06 00   3A 3A   01 00   2036   04 00  LAN BEEF   03   0600   CA3F   0100   2036   oBoo  USBTYPEA   BEEF   03   0600   5A3B   0100   2036 06 00  Set  USBTYPEB   BEEF   03   0600   FA3D   0100   2036 0C 00  MY SOURCE HDMI BEEF   03   0600   0A38   0100   2036 03 00  COMPONENT   BE EF   03   06 00   AA 3B   01 00   2036   05 00  S VIDEO BE EF   03   06 00   9A 39   01 00   20 36   02 00  VIDEO BE EF   03   06 00   6A 39   01 00   2036   01 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   C9 38   02 00   20 36   00 00  IRSE Get BEEF   03   0600   C8D7   0200   1030 00 00  agn  ri sien Increment BEEF   03   0600   AED    0400   1030 00 00  Decrement BEEF   03   0600   7FD6   0500   1030 00 00   cvm Get BEEF   03   0600   34D6   0200   1130 00 00  agn  jJ sion Increment BEEF   03   0600   52D6   0400   1130 00 00  Decrement BEEF   03   0600   83D7   0500   1130 00 00  OFF BE EF   03   06 00   FF 3D   0100   30 26   00 00  ime ED  Set ON BE EF   03   06 00   6F 3C   0100   3026   01 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   CC 3D   02 00   30 26   00 00  OFF BE EF   03   06 00   03 3C   0100   3126   00 00  een e Set ON BE EF  03   06 00   93 3D   0100   3126   01 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   30 3C   02 00   3126   00 00  OFF BEEF   03   0600   3AC3   0100   0035 00 00  IMAGE 1 BEEF   03   0600   AAC2   0100   0035 01 00  Set IMAGE
3.                                                        ex   SCART  R connector  6    jack   B 2 ES  P o  EE  Video   ES  SCART cable  MIC m  AUI  18 9 SN s  Audio L  plug    amp            L ld    wi 1 Audio R  RCA plugs    To input SCART RGB signal to the projector  use a SCART to RCA cable   Connect the plugs refer to above ex   For more reference  please consult your  dealer     ROZAS OX6JfR TR QTUTRT xS TR     When the projector connects to the computer by RS 232C communication  the  projector can be controlled with RS 232C commands from the computer    For details of RS 232C commands  refer to RS 232C Communication   Network  command table    117      Connection  1 Turn off the projector and the computer     2 Connect the projector s CONTROL port and the computer s RS 232C port    with a RS 232C cable  cross   Use the cable that fulfills the specification  shown in figure    3 Turn the computer on  and after the computer has started up turn the projector    On   4 Set the COMMUNICATION TYPE to OFF   EQOPTION menu   SERVICE       COMMUNICATION in the User s Manual   Operating Guide                                                                                      aa Gabig    RS 232C port CONTROL port  of the computer of the projector       Communicaion settings  1  Protocol  19200bps 8N1  2  Command format   h  shows hexadecimal      wwe  oT 7   elelee ee one  L H L   H LIH L   H  LIH L H    Action           lt SET gt Change setting to  desired value   cL  cH    by   eL
4.           RESOLUTION    The resolution for the COMPUTER IN1 and COMPUTER IN2 input   signals can be set on this projector     1  In the INPUT menu select the RESOLUTION using the A V  buttons and press the  gt  button   The RESOLUTION menu will be    displayed  11 STANDARD  1024 x 768    2  In the RESOLUTION menu select the RU ei BU  resolution you wish to display using s incu    pong te  the A V buttons   5 STANDARD   1366 x 768  Selecting AUTO will set a resolution EIER evum  appropriate to the input signal     3  Pressing the  gt    or ENTER button when  selecting a STANDARD resolution will  automatically adjust the horizontal and  vertical positions  clock phase and  horizontal size    The INPUT INFORMATION dialog will be  displayed     4  To set a custom resolution use the A    buttons to select  the CUSTOM and the RESOLUTION CUSTOM box will be  displayed    Set the horizontal  HORZ  and CUSTOM  vertical  VERT  resolutions using   the A V 4    buttons    This function is may not support all   resolutions     5  Move the cursor to OK on screen and press the  gt  or ENTER  button  The message  ARE YOU SURE YOU WISH TO  CHANGE RESOLUTION   appears  To save the setting  press  the  gt  button    The horizontal and vertical positions  clock phase and horizontal  size will be automatically adjusted    The INPUT INFORMATION dialog   will be displayed     6  To revert back to the previous resolution without saving changes   move the cursor to CANCEL on screen and press the  lt  
5.       Schedule Execution  Error    Schedule Execution error   L455        Lamp Time Alarm Lamp time over Alarm Time setting   Filter Time Alarm Filter time over Alarm Time setting     Transition Detector Transition Detector Alarm   QQOPTION menu in the User s  Alarm Manual     Operating Guide              When the projector is supplied with the power  it works as  below      If the STANDBY MODE is set to the NORMAL the projector s  Cold Start power status changes from    OFF    to    Standby state         If the STANDBY MODE is set to the SAVING the projector s power  status changes from    Standby state  to    ON  lamp is turned on        CQSETUP menu in the User s Manual     Operating Guide     Authentication Failure The SNMP access is detected from the invalid SNMP community              Refer to Ea  Troubleshooting  in the User s Manual     Operating Guide for  further detailed explanation of Error except Other Error and Schedule Execution  Error     53    3 6 Alert Settings  Continued     The Alert Items are shown below        Item Description    Configures the time to alert    Only Lamp Time Alarm and Filter Time Alarm      SNMP Trap Click the  Enable  check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts     Click the  Enable  check box to enable e mail alerts    Except Cold Start and Authentication Failure      Configures the subject line of the e mail to be sent    The length of the subject line can be up to 100 alphanumeric  characters     Except Cold Start and Authentication Failur
6.      16  FREEZE button  25     17  MY BUTTON   1 button    253    18  MY BUTTON   2 button    53    19  KEYSTONE button  0423     20  POSITION button  222  27    21  MENU button  2126  27     22  A     lt  P cursor buttons    126  27    23  ENTER button    126  27     24  ESC button    27     25  RESET button    27     26  Battery cover    115         a a SS SS SS NS Se aS Se See Se Se SO am                                                                 24     4T    7  25  Lo  Th  26     ne     Back of    the remote control    Serie  WO    Install the projector according to the environment and manner the projector will be  used in   Arrangement    Refer to the illustrations and tables below to determine screen size and projection  distance     The values shown in the table are calculated for a full size screen  1024 x 768     8  Screen size  diagonal   b  Projection distance   10    ED  ED Screen height   10    On a horizontal surface Suspended from the ceiling                                                Keep a space of 30 cm or more between the  sides of the projector and other objects such                                        as walls     For the case of installation in a special    state such as ceiling mount  the specified    fl mounting accessories    199  and service may  ee be required  Before installing the projector   consult your dealer about your installation   4 3 screen 16   9 screen  oa Projection distance  min  max    type         inoh   m m  inch   m   i
7.      Close                   Not displaying confirmation dialog for adding Network settings     This setting allows you to choose to display or not the confirmation dialog for  adding a Network configuration  R419  28  when you connect your computer  to the projector  It is turned off by default       Optimize Performance  The  LiveViewer  captures computer screen in JPEG data and sends the  JPEG data to the projector  The    LiveViewer    has two options that have  different compression rate of JPEG data     Transmission speed  Speed takes priority over Image quality   It makes JPEG compression rate higher   The screen on the projector is rewritten quicker because the  transferred data is smaller  but the image quality is worse     Image quality  Image quality takes priority over Speed   It makes JPEG compression rate lower   The screen on the projector is rewritten slower because the    transferred data is larger  but the image quality is better     41    2 1 Using the  LiveViewer   continued        Presenter Mode  In the Single PC mode  the projector can be occupied by one computer  and can block an access from any other computer  if the Presenter mode is  selected in the  LiveViewer    While making your presentation  you don t need to worry that the image on  screen is unexpectedly switched to an image sent by another computer   If you want to turn it on  put a check mark in the check box     NOTE   If the Multi PC mode is selected  the setting for the Presenter mode is  
8.      Do not stop up  block or otherwise cover the projector s vents      Keep a space of 30 cm or more between the sides of the projector and other  objects such as walls      Do not place or attach anything that would block the lens or vent holes      Do not place the projector on metallic thing or anything weak in heat      Do not place the projector on carpet  cushions or bedding      Do not place the projector in direct sunlight or near hot objects such as heaters      Do not place anything near the projector lens or vents  or on top of the  projector      Do not place anything that may be sucked into or stick to the vents on the  bottom of the projector  This projector has some intake vents also on the  bottom     gt  Do not place the projector anyplace where it may get wet  Getting the projector   wet or inserting liquid into the projector could cause fire  electric shock and or   malfunction of the projector      Do not place the projector in a bathroom or the outdoors      Do not place anything containing liquid near the projector     gt  Use only the mounting accessories the manufacturer specified  and leave   installing and removing the projector with the mounting accessories to the   service personnel      Read and keep the user s manual of the mounting accessories used     ANCAUTION     Avoid placing the projector in smoky  humid or dusty place   Placing the projector in such places could cause fire  electric shock and or  malfunction of the projector      Do not 
9.      Take care of the air filter to normal ventilate    The air filter should be cleaned periodically  If the air filter becomes clogged  by dust or the like  internal temperature rises and could cause malfunction   The projector may display the message such as    CHECK THE AIR FLOW   or turn off the projector  to prevent the internal heat level rising      When the indicators or a message prompts you to clean the air filter  clean  the air filter as soon as possible      If the soiling will not come off the air filter  or it becomes damaged  replace  the air filter      Use the air filter of the specified type only  Please order the air filter  specified in the other manual of this projector to your dealer      When you replace the lamp  replace also the air filter  The air filter may be  attached when you buy a replacement lamp for this projector      Do not turn on the projector without air filter     Avoid a high temperature environment    The heat could have adverse influence on the cabinet of the projector and  other parts  Do not place the projector  the remote control and other parts in  direct sunlight or near a hot object such as heater  etc     Avoid Magnetism    Manufacture strongly recommends to avoid any magnetic contact that is not  shielded or protected on or near the projector itself   ie    Magnetic Security  Devices  or other projector accessory that contains magnetic material that has not  been provided by the manufacture etc   Magnetic objects may cause i
10.      gt  Do not use cleaners or chemicals other than those specified in this manual     gt  Do not polish or wipe with hard objects     NOTICE    Do not directly touch the lens surface with hands     90    mroubleshootimg       If an abnormal operation should occur  stop using the projector immediately        Otherwise if a problem occurs with the projector  the following checks and measures are  recommended before requesting repair    If this does not resolve the problem  please contact your dealer or service company  They  Will tell you what warranty condition is applied     Related messages    When some message appears  check and cope with it according to the following table   Although these messages will be automatically disappeared around several minutes  it will  be reappeared every time the power is turned on     Message Description    There is no input signal   Please confirm the signal input connection  and the status  of the signal source     The USB TYPE B port is selected as the picture input  source even if MOUSE is selected for USB TYPE B    151    Select USB DISPLAY in the dialog to project the picture  input to the USB TYPE B port  In this case  you cannot use  the simple mouse and keyboard function  Otherwise select  other port for picture input           Projector is waiting for an image file    Check the hardware connection  settings on the projector  and network related settings    The computer Projector network connection might be  disconnected  Please re
11.     170   Messenger Configures the parameters for Messenger data display     872   Slideshow Configures the Start Stop parameters for the Slideshow                    Click the  Register  button to add new commands to the schedule list   Click the  Delete  button to delete commands from the schedule list     Click the  Reset  button to delete all commands and reset the schedule settings  from the schedule list     56    3 7 Schedule Settings  Continued     NOTE    After the projector is moved  check the date and time set for the  projector before configuring the schedules  Strong shock may make the date  and time settings  L58  get out of tune      Events  My Image  and  Messenger  will not be executed appropriately but  result in  schedule execution error  status in case lamp does not light or and  display data are not stored in the projector at the scheduled event execution  time      Events    Input Source  and    My Image  will not be executed if security feature  is enabled and the projector is locked due to the feature      Certain error state in the projector  such as temperature error  lamp error  will  prevent the projector from appropriate execution of scheduled functions events      f no USB memory device is inserted to the projector or no image data for  display exists at the scheduled event time  a schedule execution error occurs  against the scheduled Slideshow event      When you start the Slideshow  input source will be automatically switched to  the USB TYPE 
12.     22    1 6 Manual configuration       There are 3 options for the manual    Ssloct the manual connection method you woudd lae to usar                   configuration  c pata i    Profile  CAbelow  mers WEIL  e History  424   e Configure Network Settings Manually  2125  edin e careta       Hetnry  Proctor name IP address Last connected n  If you select Configure Network Settings fom  Mo en me za  Manually  proceed to item 1 7 Configuring the sanam ricum s ll  network settings manually     125  la Me sas ab i  smak   correct       ex          1 6 1 Profile connection  Selecting a profile data connect the network E acne RATER  with the projector    It is required to store the profile data in  advance     133              1  Select the  Profile         Projector name IP address Last connected    Projecter 1 192 168 1 101 11 30 2009 3 23 24 PM  Projector 192 168  1 102 11 30 200  m  Projector 3 192 168 1 103 11 30 2009       2  Choose a profile data listed in the window          C Congre Network Settings Manual   3  Click the  Connect      uk   comet   ck          4  The network connection will be established   Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the  connection to your destination     130     NOTE   To check the setting in a profile data  follow the process below    1  Choose a profile data that you want to check    2  Move the mouse cursor to the profile data  and click the right button on the  mouse to display a pop up menu    3  Select the    Property    in the pop up menu  and 
13.     Please see the Contents of package section in the User s Manual  concise   which is a book  Your projector should come with the items shown there  Require  of your dealer immediately if any items are missing     NOTE   Keep the original packing materials  for future reshipment  Be sure    to use the original packing materials when moving the projector  Use special  caution for the lens        Part names    Projector     1  Lamp cover  185   The lamp unit is inside   Focus ring    21   Zoom ring  21   Control panel  215   Elevator buttons  x 2     121   Elevator feet  x 2     221   Remote sensor  15    8  Lens    90    9  Intake vents   10  Filter cover  R487   The air filter and intake vent are  inside    11  Battery cover  The internal clock battery is inside    12  Speaker    412  18  42    13  Exhaust vent   14  AC IN  AC inlet     114    15  Rear panel  5    16    17    18      2   3   4   5   6   7    we ws a SS SS GS    Security bar    14   Security slot  14   Shutdown switch  L194        ANWARNING b   HOT    Do not touch around the lamp cover and the exhaust  vents during use or just after use  since it is too hot     gt  Do not look into the lens or vents while the lamp is on  since the strong light is  not good for your eyes     gt  Do not handle the elevator buttons without holding the projector  since the  projector may drop down     ANCAUTION     Maintain normal ventilation to prevent the projector from  heating up  Do not cover  block or plug up the vents  Do
14.     When the authentication setting is enabled  the following settings are required     6  Click the  Security Settings  on the main menu   7  Select the  Network Control  and enter the desired authentication password   8  Click the  Apply  button to save the settings     NOTE    The Authentication Password will be the same for Network Control  Port1  Port  23   Network Control Port2  Port  9715   PJLink    Port  Port   4352   My Image Port  Port  9716  and Messenger Port  Port  9719       The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network    connection  When the configuration settings are changed  you must restart the  network connection  You can restart the network connection by clicking the   Network Restart  on the main menu        73        NetwonktBrnidgerEunction    This projector is equipped with the NETWORK BRIDGE function to perform  mutual conversion of a network protocol and a serial interface    Using the NETWORK BRIDGE function  a computer that is connected with   this projector by Ethernet communication can control an external device that is  connected with this projector by RS 232C communication as a network terminal     TCP IP data Protocol change Serial data                                           Ethernet RS 232C  LAN cable RS 232C cable  External device  Computer  CA s  LAN port CONTROL port    6 1 Connecting devices    1  Connect the projector s LAN port and the computer s LAN port with a LAN  cable  for Ethernet communication    
15.     am  0660       0009008  amp     MIC      AUDIO     CriPr A CONTROL    Lu Ns our CRIB      RB          oon                                        NOTE   If an oversized USB storage device blocks the LAN port  use a USB  extension cable to connect the USB storage device     Connecting to a power supply    1 Put the connector of the power cord into the    AC IN  AC inlet  of the projector     2 Firmly plug the power cord s plug into the    outlet  In a couple of seconds after the  power supply connection  the POWER  indicator will light up in steady orange     Please remember that when the DIRECT POWER  ON function activated    50   the connection of the AC IN Power cord  power supply make the projector turn on        ANWARNING Please use extra caution when connecting the power cord  as  incorrect or faulty connections may result in fire and or electrical shock      Only use the power cord that came with the projector  If it is damaged  consult  your dealer to get a new one      Only plug the power cord into an outlet whose voltage is matched to the power  cord  The power outlet should be close to the projector and easily accessible   Remove the power cord for complete separation      Never modify the power cord     Using the security bar and slot   Security slot  A commercial anti theft chain or wire up to N  10 mm in diameter can be attached to the  security bar on the projector    Also this product has the security slot for  the Kensington lock    For details  see the man
16.    06 00   FA 31   01 00   00 36 04 00  LAN BEEF   03   0600 0A 34 01 00 00 36 OB 00  USB TYPEA BEEF   03   0600 9A 30 01 00 00 36 06 00  USB TYPE B BEEF   03   0600 3A 36 01 00 00 36 0C 00  HDMI BEEF   03   0600   CA33   0100 00 36 03 00  COMPONENT BE EF   03   06 00   6A 30   01 00   00 36 05 00  S VIDEO BE EF   03   06 00   5A32   01 00   00 36 02 00  VIDEO BE EF   03   06 00   AA 32   01 00   00 36 01 00  SLIDESHOW BEEF   03   0600   9A2B   0100 00 36 22 00  MY IMAGE BE EF   03   06 00   5A3D   0100 00 36 16 00  Set  MESSENGER BE EF   03   06 00   AA29   0100 00 36 25 00  MY BUTTON 1 INFORMATION   BE EF   03   06 00   FA 3E   01 00   00 36 10 00  AUTO KEYSTONE V  BE EF   03   06 00   6A 3F   01 00   00 36 11 00  MY MEMORY BE EF   03   06 00   9A 3F   01 00   00 36 12 00  ACTIVE IRIS     BE EF   03   06 00   AA 3D   01 00   00 36 15 00  PICTURE MODE   BE EF   03   06 00   OA 3E   01 00   00 36 13 00  FILTER RESET   BE EF   03   06 00   3A 3C   01 00   00 36 14 00  AV MUTE BE EF   03   06 00   AA 38   01 00   00 36 19 00  TEMPLATE BE EF   03   06 00   CA 39   01 00   00 36 1B 00  RESOLUTION BEEF   03   0600   9A3A   0100 00 36 1E 00  MIC VOLUME BEEF   03   0600 9A 24 01 00 00 36 36 00  ECO MODE BEEF   03   0600 0A 25 01 00 00 36 37 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   09 33   02 00   00 36 00 00   NOTE    ACTIVE IRIS is available only for CP X2511N  CP X3011N  and CP X4011N   COMPUTER IN1   BE EF   03   06 00   C6 32   01 00   01 36 00 00  COMPUTER IN2   BE EF   03   06 00   06 30 
17.    1 Turning on the MyScreen PASSWORD  1 1 Use the A Y buttons on the SECURITY menu to  select MyScreen PASSWORD and press the  gt   button to display the MyScreen PASSWORD on   off menu   1 2 Use the A Y buttons on the MyScreen  PASSWORD on off menu to select ON   The ENTER NEW PASSWORD box  small  D  will be displayed  ENTER NEW PASSWORD  1 3 Use the A     lt  P buttons to enter the box  small   password  Move the cursor to the right side  of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box  small   and press the P   button to display the NEW  PASSWORD AGAIN box  enter the same  PASSWORD again   1 4 Move the cursor to the right side of the  NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and press  the  gt  button to display the NOTE NEW  PASSWORD box for about 30 seconds   please make note of the password during  this time   Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or    button on the  projector will return to MyScreen PASSWORD on off menu   When a password is set for MyScreen     The MyScreen registration function  and menu  will be unavailable     The MyScreen Lock menu will be unavailable     The START UP setting will be locked on MyScreen  and the menu will be  unavailable    Turning the MyScreen PASSWORD off will allow normal operation of these  functions       Please do not forget your MyScreen PASSWORD     2 Turning off the MyScreen PASSWORD  2 1 Follow the procedure in 1 1 to display the MyScreen PASSWORD on off  menu   2 2 Select OFF to display the ENTER  PASSWORD box  large   Enter the registered  pass
18.    745     Mae 16    mode  S    S  1152 x 864 VESA   1152 x 864  75Hz          600   VESA   W XGA  60Hz   1280x800        497        600    VESA _  1280x800  60Hz   1280x960     600         600   VESA  1280x960  60Hz     1280 x 768    64 0  75 0    1400x1050     652       600       VESA   SXGA   60Hz       1600x1200       750       X 600       VESA    UXGA 60Hz     NOTE     Be sure to check jack type  signal level  timing and resolution before  connecting this projector to a PC     Some PCs may have multiple display screen modes  Use of some of these modes  will not be possible with this projector     Depending on the input signal  full size display may not be possible in some cases   Refer to the number of display pixels above     Although the projector can display signals with resolution up to UXGA  1600x1200    the signal will be converted to the projector s panel resolution before being displayed   The best display performance will be achieved if the resolutions of the input signal  and projector panel are identical     Automatic adjustment may not function correctly with some input signals     The image may not be displayed correctly when the input sync signal is a composite  sync or a sync on G        Initial setisignals    The following signals are used for the initial settings  The signal timing of some  computer models may be different  In such case  adjust the items V POSITION  and H POSITION in the IMAGE menu     Back porch  B     Data  H  Sync     Sync  A     Reso
19.    For details  see the section Presenter mode in the  User s Manual   Network Guide     Selecting this item displays the user name  This  function helps you identify from which computer the  current image is sent      You can set user names for each computer on   LiveViwer     For details  see the section Display User Name in  the User s Manual     Network Guide        65    Description    Selecting this item displays the NETWORK INFORMATION dialog  for confirming the network settings               NETWORK _ INFORMATION    PASSCODE 0000 0000 0000   PROJECTOR NAME Projector Name   IP ADDRESS 192  168  1  254   SUBNET MASK 255  255  255  0   DEFAULT GATEWAY 0  0  0  0   ONS SERVER 0  0  0 0   MAC ADDRESS FF FF FF FF FF FF   TIME DIFFERENCE GMT00 00   DATE AND TIME 2000 1 1 0 00     RETURN   INFORMATION     For the details of PASSCODE  see the section Selecting the  network connection method in the User s manual     Network  Guide     Only the first 16 characters of the projector name are displayed     When the voltage level of the battery for the built in clock    decreases  the set time may become incorrect even though accurate    date and time are input  Replace the battery suitably    089       IP ADDRESS  SUBNET MASK and DEFAULT GATEWAY indicate     0 0 0 0    when DHCP is ON and the projector has not gotten  address from DHCP server     Executing this item restarts and initializes the network functions   Choose the RESTART EXECUTE using the button  gt      4 SERVICE S  Du
20.    Port  Port   4352   My Image Port  Port  9716  and Messenger Port  Port  9719        The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network  connection  When the configuration settings are changed  you must restart the  network connection  You can restart the network connection by clicking the   Network Restart  on the main menu        85    7 4 Command Control via the Network  Continued     Command Format    Command formats differ among the different communication ports     e TCP  23    You can use the RS 232C commands without any changes  The reply   data format is the same as the RS 232C commands   EQ    RS 232C  Communication  in the User s Manual     Operating Guide  Technical    However  the following reply will be sent back in the event of authentication  failure when authentication is enabled       Reply in the event of an authentication error                        Reply Error code  Ox1F 0x04 0x00  e TCP  9715    Send Data format  The following formatting is added to the header  0 x 02   Data length  0 x OD    Checksum  1 byte  and Connection ID  1 byte  of the RS 232C commands     Header    Data length RS 232Ccommand Check Sum   Connection          0x02       Header  Data length    RS 232C command       0x0D 13 bytes 1 byte 1 byte                0x02  Fixed   RS 232C commands byte length  Ox0D  Fixed   RS 232C commands that start with OxBE OxEF   13 bytes     Check Sum     This is the value to make zero on the addition of the  lower 8 bits from
21.    ucc rnt ttn rre terne en enr op ce e e 23  1 6 2 History  CONNECHOM    onere tret rn rtt ttr terne bh nen e n toe te tee 24  1 7 Configuring the network settings manually                             eese 25  1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination                       ssssssssss 30  1 8 1 Connection and transmis Sioi sesso senn ertet pibe hitherto inta spe bani 30  1 8 2 Connection error   1 9 Protile data  uere rene eet aie teda tree eines xe tdeo dedans  1 9 1 Outline of  Profile data 5 5  rr rrr rer mr EP Er rre Rete 33  1 9 2 Making  Profile data  riter once ee Pre ter rn reete ive Ee erg 33  1 9 3 Editing Profile data         n re o e ee Eco iicet tede ues ees nae ENa E 34  1 9 4 Registering My ConnoectlOn       cris o e ette cesser endi dp det GE PER RR EORR eng 35  2  Network Presentation iuusccciievssccc iu bi cE bxE S ER ETAEE RUM EBEN EE 37  2 1 Using the  LiveViewer   sorron nira aada enne 37  2 1 1 Main  menu  and Operating DHtfORnS         tret teet tat ise tet pnr edid ate 37  2 12 Displaying the Status  3    otro qe eere york a oo madii Cte do ede qu 39  2 13  Switching the display mode  5 5    2  eite tr ep tati o o De ica 40  2 1 4 Option menu                           4  2 2 Starting the Network Presentation                     ssssse 43  VERBI Wie m T                                      43  2 2 2 Presenter Tode           cocer ra n ert E HE He CERO EET ERE RE EXE never HE VENIRE EER 44  2 2 9 Display User Name  eee EDU cest cree pede cp eara 
22.   01 00   01 36 04 00  LAN BEEF   03   0600 F6 35 01 00 01 36 OB 00  USB TYPEA BEEF   03   0600 66 31 01 00 01 36 06 00  USB TYPE B BEEF   03   0600   C637   0100 01 36 0C 00  HDMI BEEF   03   0600 36 32 01 00 01 36 03 00  Set  COMPONENT BE EF   03   06 00   96 31   01 00   01 36 05 00  S VIDEO BE EF   03   06 00   A6 33   01 00   01 36 02 00  VIDEO BE EF   03   06 00   56 33   01 00   01 36 01 00  SLIDESHOW BEEF   03   0600 662A   0100 01 36 22 00  MY IMAGE  BE EF   03   06 00   A63C   0100 01 36 16 00  MESSENGER BE EF   03   06 00   5628 01 00 01 36 25 00  NIE BUTTON 2 INFORMATION   BE EF   03   06 00   06 3F   01 00   01 36 10 00  AUTO KEYSTONE V  BE EF   03   06 00   96 3E   01 00   01 36 11 00  MY MEMORY BE EF   03   06 00   66 3E   01 00   01 36 12 00  ACTIVE IRIS     BE EF   03   06 00   56 3C   01 00   01 36 15 00  PICTURE MODE   BE EF   03   06 00   F6 3F   01 00   01 36 13 00  FILTER RESET   BE EF   03   06 00   C6 3D   01 00   01 36 14 00  AV MUTE BE EF   03   06 00   56 39   01 00   01 36 19 00  TEMPLATE BE EF   03   06 00   36 38   01 00   01 36 1B 00  RESOLUTION BEEF   03   0600   66 3B 01 00 01 36 1E 00  MIC VOLUME BEEF   03   0600 66 25 01 00 01 36 36 00  ECO MODE BEEF   03   0600 F6 24 01 00 01 36 37 00  Get BE EF   03 06 00 F5 32 02 00 01 36 00 00             NOTE    ACTIVE IRIS is available only for CP X2511N  CP X3011N  and CP X4011N         continued on next page     28       Names    Operation Type    Header    Command Data                               
23.   01 01 02 0   Alexandra Technopark  119967 SINSEESEE   Tel   65  6536 2520   Fax   65  6536 2521    gt  htto   www hitachiconsumer com sg             Hitachi Sales Corp  of Taiwan   2  Floor  No 65  Nanking East Road  Section 3   Taipei 104 TAIWAN   Tel   886 2 2516 0500   Fax   886 2 2516 1501    gt  htto   www hsct com tw    Hitachi Sales  Thailand   Ltd   994  Soi Thonglor  Sukhumvit 55 Road   Klongtonnua  Vadhana  Bangkok 10110  THAILAND   Tel   66  2381 8381 98   Fax   66  2381 0210 2381 0021    gt  htto   www hitachi th com             Hitachi Consumer Electronics Co  Ltd   292 Yoshida cho  Totsuka ku   Yokohama 244 0817 JAPAN   Tel   81 45 415 2625   Fax   81 45 866 5821    gt  htto   www hitachi co jp proj        www hitachidigitalmedia com    
24.   01 30 02 00  H amp V INVERT BE EF   03   06 00   37 D2   01 00   01 30 03 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   FAD2   02 00   01 30 00 00  NORMAL BE EF   03   06 00   D6 D2   01 00   01 60 00 00  ODE  Sel SAVING BE EF   03   06 00   46 D3   01 00   01 60 01 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   E5 D2   02 00   01 60 00 00  COMPUTER IN1   BE EF   03   06 00   3E F4   01 00   BO 20 00 00  EN Set OFF BE EF   03   06 00   CE B5   01 00   BO 20 FF 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   OD F4   02 00   BO 20 00 00  COMPUTER IN2   BE EF   03   06 00   CE F7   01 00   B4 20 04 00  A INS Set OFF BE EF   03   06 00   FE B4   01 00   B4 20 FF 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   3D F5   02 00   B4 20 00 00              continued on next page     22       Names    Operation Type    Header    Command Data                                                                                                                                                       CRC Action Type Type   COMPUTER IN1   BE EF   03   06 00   F2 F4   01 00   B5 20 00 00   MONITOR OUT   Set  COMPUTER IN2   BE EF   03   06 00   32 F6   01 00   B5 20 04 00    COMPONENT OFF BE EF   03   06 00   02 B5   01 00   B5 20 FF 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   C1 F4   02 00   B5 20 00 00   COMPUTER IN1   BE EF   03   06 00   86 F5   01 00   B2 20 00 00   MONITOR OUT   Set  COMPUTER IN2   BE EF   03   06 00   46 F7   01 00   B2 20 04 00    S VIDEO OFF BE EF   03   06 00   76 B4   01 00   B2 20 FF 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   B5 F5   0200   B2 20 00 00   COMPUTER IN1   BE
25.   06 00   CE DC   01 00   34 20 00 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   FD DC   02 00   34 20 00 00   OFF BEEF   03   0600   DADF   0100 3B 20 00 00   AUDIO Set AUDIO1 BEEF   03   0600   4ADE   0100 3B 20 01 00  SOURCE LAN AUDIO2 BEEF   03   0600   BADE   0100 3B 20 02 00  AUDIO3 BEEF   03   0600   2ADF   0100 3B 20 03 00   Get BEEF   03   0600   E9DF   0200 3B 20 00 00   OFF BEEF   03   0600   76DD   0100 36 20 00 00   AUDIO Set AUDIO1 BEEF   03   0600   E6DC   0100 36 20 01 00  SOURCE   USB AUDIO2 BEEF   03   0600   16DC   0100 36 20 02 00  TYPEA AUDIO3 BEEF   03   0600   86DD   0100 36 20 03 00   Get BEEF   03   0600   45DD   0200 36 20 00 00   OFF BEEF   03   0600   AEDE   0100   3C20 00 00   AUDIO Set AUDIO1 BEEF   03   0600   3EDF   0100   3C20 01 00  SOURCE USB AUDIO2 BEEF   03   0600   CEDF   0100   3C20 02 00  TYPE B AUDIO3 BEEF   03   0600   5EDE   0100 3C 20 03 00   Get BEEF   03   0600   9DDE   0200 3C 20 00 00                                   continued on next page     24       Names    Operation Type    Header    Command Data                                                                                                                                                                                                 CRC Action Type Type  OFF BEEF   03   0600   BADD   0100 33 20 00 00  AUDIO1 BEEF   03   0600   2ADC   0100 33 20 01 00  EOUEEE Set AUDIO2 BEEF   03   0600   DADC   0100 33 20 02 00  HDMI 7 AUDIO3 BEEF   03   0600   4ADD   0100 33 20 03 00  AUDIO_HDMI BEEF   
26.   16 30 00 00  MENU  POSITION V Execute BE EF   03   06 00   AB C7   06 00   44 70 00 00  Reset  MyScreen BE EF   03   06 00   FB CA   01 00   00 30 20 00  ORIGINAL BE EF   03   06 00   FBE2   01 00   00 30 40 00  BLANK Set BLUE BE EF   03   06 00   CB D3   01 00   00 30 03 00  WHITE BE EF   03   06 00   6B DO   01 00   00 30 05 00  BLACK BE EF   03   06 00   9B DO   01 00   00 30 06 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   08 D3   02 00   00 30 00 00  OFF BE EF   03   06 00   FB D8   01 00   20 30 00 00  BLANK On Off ib ON BE EF   03   06 00   6B D9   01 00   20 30 01 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   C8 D8   02 00   20 30 00 00  MyScreen BE EF   03   06 00   CB CB  01 00   04 30 20 00  Se ORIGINAL BE EF   03   06 00   OB D2   01 00   04 30 00 00  STARTUP OFF BE EF   03   06 00   9B D3   01 00   04 30 01 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   38 D2   02 00   04 30 00 00  Se OFF BE EF   03   06 00   3B EF   01 00   CO 30 00 00  MyScreen Lock ON BE EF   03   06 00   AB EE   01 00   CO 30 01 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   08 EF   02 00   CO 30 00 00  Se OFF BE EF   03   06 00   8F D6   01 00   17 30 00 00  MESSAGE ON BE EF   03   06 00   1F D7   01 00   17 30 01 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   BC D6   0200   17 30 00 00                                   continued on next page     26       Names    Operation Type    Header    Command Data                                                                                                                                                          CRC Action Type Type 
27.   A dialog is displayed for confirmation  Selecting the OK using the  gt   button performs resetting    See the FILTER TIME item in OPTION menu  452      Using the  lt   gt  buttons changes the display language   See the LANGUAGE item in SCREEN menu  444      Press the    or ENTER button to use the menu of PICTURE   IMAGE  INPUT  SETUP  AUDIO  SCREEN  OPTION  NETWORK or  SECURITY     EXIT Press the  lt  or ENTER button to finish the OSD menu     29    PAKS SES Tine    From the PICTURE menu  items shown in the table  below can be performed    Select an item using the 4    cursor buttons  and press  the  gt  cursor button or ENTER button to execute the  item  Then perform it according to the following table        Item Description    Using the  lt   gt  buttons adjusts the brightness   Dark  amp  Light    CONTRAST Using the  lt   gt  buttons adjusts the contrast   Weak    Strong    Using the A    buttons switches the gamma mode     1 DEFAULT  amp  1 CUSTOM  amp  2 DEFAULT   2 CUSTOM  amp  3 DEFAULT    g 2  6 CUSTOM 3 CUSTOM          BRIGHTNESS    g 2  6 DEFAULT  amp  5 CUSTOM    5 DEFAULT   4 CUSTOM  amp  4 DEFAULT    To adjust CUSTOM    Selecting a mode whose name includes CUSTOM and then  pressing the    button or the ENTER button displays    a dialog to aid you in adjusting the mode   This function is useful when you want to  change the brightness of particular tones     Choose an item using the  lt  P gt  buttons   and adjust the level using the A    buttons     You can dis
28.   A dialog will appear on the screen to aid you in adjusting the   volume  If you do not do anything  the dialog will automatically   disappear after a few seconds  SENE    e When X is selected for current picture input port  the volume adjustment is  disabled  Please see AUDIO SOURCE item of AUDIO menu    142    e Even if the projector is in the standby state  the volume is adjustable when  both of the following conditions are true     An option other than X is selected for STANDBY in the AUDIO SOURCE  item of the AUDIO menu    142      NORMAL is selected in the STANDBY MODE item of the SETUP menu    142         Temporarily muting the sound MUTE button    1 _ Press MUTE button on the remote control   A dialog will appear on the screen indicating that you have  muted the sound   To restore the sound  press the MUTE  VOLUME   or  VOLUME   button  Even if you do not do anything  the dialog  will automatically disappear after a few seconds        e When Xx is selected for current picture input port  the sound is always muted   Please see AUDIO SOURCE item of AUDIO menu    142     e C C   Closed Caption  is automatically activated when sound is muted and an  input signal containing C C  is received  This function is available only when  the signal is NTSC for VIDEO or S VIDEO  or 480i 60 for COMPONENT   COMPUTER IN1 or COMPUTER IN2  and when AUTO is selected for  DISPLAY in the C C  menu under the SCREEN menu  E149      Selecting an input signal    1 Press INPUT button on the pro
29.   A new profile data will be created and it is  registered as My Connection profile data     Yes No    NOTE   If there are already 10 profile data  the check box cannot be checked   Please erase one of the existing profile data       The profile name for the stored data is assigned by the  LiveViewer   automatically  The name will be shown at the right side of the check box        36    2  NK Eresentation    2 1 Using the    LiveViewer       When you get the connection between your projector and computer  the   LiveViewer  main menu will be shown on the computer screen    On the main menu you can configure settings and operate functions to send your  images to the projector     2 1 1 Main menu and Operating buttons  1  Menu Type    There are 2 type of the main menu  Easy type and Advanced type  which can  be switched on screen       When the    LiveViewer       is started  the last used type will be on screen     When the network connection is not established  the Advanced type will be on  screen     Easy Type Advanced Type  Status Display                 r Switch to 34     Switch to Advanced type Easy type 2M  4            E 44            i4             Indicator             9    2  Operating buttons       Starting Capture button  The transmission to the projector is started and the images will be displayed   The Display mode will be the Single PC mode at first  After that  the last  Display mode will be applied    Q Stop button  The image transmission is stopped     NOTE   
30.   Ext          Enter PassCode  If you want to use the Passcode for network connection  select the  Enter  PassCode  and click the  Next      The Passcode is given by the projector on screen  And you simply input the  Passcode to the    LiveViewer    to connect the network   Proceed to item 1 5 1 Passcode connection     115     Configure Manually  Select the  Configure Manually  and click the  Next    Then  proceed to item 1 6 Manual Configuration     1123     Select From List   Before selecting this item  your computer and the projectors need to be connected  to the same network    If the connection is already established  select the  Select From List     From the list of the projectors connected to the network  select which projector  you would like to send your images  Proceed to 1 8 Confirming the connection  to your destination   2130     1 5 Selecting the network connection method  continued     1 5 1 Passcode connection    The unique Passcode system brings you very quick and simple connection to the  network    The Passcode is a code that expresses the network setting in the projector  If you  input the code in the  LiveViewer  in your computer  the network setting in the projector  and computer can be matched and the connection will be established immediately   The section is intended to explain how to use the Passcode      1  Getting the Passcode  The Passcode is 12 digit code consisting of alphanumeric characters     1 9    and   A Z      Example  PASSCODE 1234 5678 
31.   Ge ew    NORMAL    H INVERT    V INVERT    H amp V INVERT  t St  If the Transition Detector is on and MIRROR status is changed   TRANSITION DETECTOR ON alarm    170  will be displayed when  projector is restarted after the AC power is turned off                                               Using A F buttons switches the standby mode setting between  NORMAL and SAVING    NORMAL    amp  SAVING  When SAVING is selected  the power consumption in the standby  mode is lowered with some functional restriction as below     When SAVING is selected  the RS 232C communication control  except to turn the projector on and the network function are disabled    while the projector is in the standby mode  If the COMMUNICATION  TYPE in the COMMUNICATION menu is set to NETWORK  BRIDGE  all of the RS 232C commands are disabled    457       When SAVING is selected  STANDBY setting of AUDIO SOURCE     42  is invalid  and no signal is output from AUDIO OUT port in  the standby mode     While the image signal from the input port chosen in step  1  is  projected  the image signal from the input port selected in step  2  is  output to MONITOR OUT port    1  Choose a picture input port using A V buttons    Choose STANDBY to select the picture   output in the standby mode    2  Select one of the COMPUTER IN ports   using  lt   gt  buttons    Select OFF to disable the MONITOR OUT   port for the input port or standby mode   chosen in the step  1      You cannot select COMPUTER IN1 in step  1  and COMPU
32.   Hitachi Europe S A S   Digital Media Group  77 Rue Alexandre Dumas   69120 Vaulx en Velin FRANCE   Tel  04 37 42 84 30   Email  france consommateur hitachi eu com    Hitachi Europe GmbH   Am Seestern 1   40547 Dusseldorf GERMANY   Tel  211 5283 808   Fax  211 5283 809   Hotline  0180   551 25 51  12ct min      Email  Service germany hitachi eu com    Hitachi Europe S A    364  Kifissias Ave   amp  1  Delfon Str   152 33 Chalandri   Athens GREECE   Tel  210 6837200   Fax  210 6835694   Email  dmgservice gr hitachi eu com             Hitachi Europe S r l   Via T  Gulli  39  20147 MILANO ITALY    Hitachi Europe S A    Gran Via Carles IIl  86 Planta 5   Edificios Trade   Torre Este  08028 Barcelona SPAIN   Tel  0034 934 092 5 50   Email  garantias ltr hitachi es    Hitachi Europe AB  Fr  sundaviks Alle 15    169 29 Solna SWEDEN       Hitachi Australia Pty Ltd    Level 3  82 Waterloo Road   North Ryde N S W 2113 AUSTRALIA  Tel   61  2 9888 4100   Fax   61  2 9888 4188     gt  htto   www hitachi com au    Hitachi  Hong Kong   Ltd    18 F   Ever Gain Centre  28 On Muk Street    Shatin  N T  HONG KONG   Tel   852  2113 8883   Fax   852  2783 4178     gt  htto   www hitachi hk com hk    Hitachi Sales  Malaysia  Sdn  Bhd    Lot 12  Jalan Kamajuan  Bangi Industrial Estate   43650 Bandar Baru Bangi  Selangor Darul Ehsan  MALAYSIA   Tel   60  3 8926 4 168   Fax   60  3 8926 3013     gt  htto   www hitachiconsumer com my    Hitachi Home Electronics hela   S  Pte Ltd   438A Alexandra Road
33.   Other FUNCHONS T                 78  7 1 E mail Alerts sirrcna asana aa ES 78  7 2 Projector Management using SNMP                ssss eee 80  7 3  Event Sched  ling 5  ie cet ters etia e E eaa dA A RE ES 81  7 4 Command Control via the Network                    sse 84   8  Troubleshooting Me et 89   9  Warranty and after sales service                                            92    4e eonnectionitorthemetwornk    1 1 System requirements  1 1 1 Required equipment preparation    The following equipments are required to connect the projector to your computer  through the network     Y Projector   Y LAN cable  to connect the projector to a network   CAT 5 or greater   Y Computer  minimum 1 set   equipped with the network feature   100Base TX or 10Base T     1 1 2 Hardware and software requirement for computer    The  LiveViewer  software needs to be installed on all the computers to connect  to the projector through a network  To use the  LiveViewer  your computer needs  to meet the following requirements     Y OS  One of the following    Windows   XP Home Edition  Professional Edition  32 bit version only   Windows Vista    Home Basic  Home Premium  Business  Ultimate  Enterprise  32  bit version only    Y CPU  Pentium 4  2 8 GHz or higher     Y Graphic card  16 bit  XGA or higher     When using the  LiveViewer  it is recommended that the display resolution of  your computer is set to 1024 x 768    Y Memory  512 MB or higher   v Hard disk space  30 MB or higher   Y Web brow
34.   TEST PATTERN   BE EF   03   06 00   43 D9   01 00   22 30 00 00   DOT LINE1 BE EF   03   06 00   D3 D8   01 00   22 30 01 00   DOT LINE2 BE EF   03   06 00   23 D8   01 00   22 30 02 00   DOT LINE3 BE EF   03   06 00   B3 D9   01 00   22 30 03 00   Set DOT LINE4 BE EF   03   06 00   83 DB   01 00   22 30 04 00   TEMPLATE CIRCLE 1 BEEF   03   0600 13DA   0100 22 30 05 00   CIRCLE 2 BEEF   03   0600   E3DA   0100 22 30 06 00   MAP 1 BEEF   03   0600   83 D4   0100 22 30 10 00   MAP 2 BEEF   03   0600 13D5   0100 22 30 11 00   Get BE EF   03   06 00   70 D9   02 00   22 30 00 00   OFF BE EF   03   06 00   BF D8   01 00   23 30 00 00   U Onl   Se ON BE EF   03   06 00   2F D9   01 00   23 30 01 00   Get BE EF   03   06 00   8C D8   02 00   23 30 00 00   OFF BE EF   03   06 00   FA 62   01 00   00 37 00 00   Se ON BE EF   03   06 00   6A 63   01 00   00 37 01 00   Scone AUTO BE EF   03   06 00   9A 63   01 00   00 37 02 00   Get BE EF   03   06 00   C9 62   02 00   00 37 00 00   CAPTIONS BE EF   03   06 00   06 63   01 00   01 37 00 00   C  C    MODE   TEXT BE EF   03   06 00   96 62   01 00   01 37 01 00   Get BE EF   03   06 00   35 63   02 00   01 37 00 00   1 BE EF   03   06 00   D2 62   01 00   02 37 01 00   C C   Set 2 BE EF   03   06 00   22 62   01 00   02 37 02 00   CHANNEL 3 BE EF   03   06 00   B2 63   01 00   02 37 03 00   4 BE EF   03   06 00   82 61   01 00   02 37 04 00   Get BE EF   03   06 00   71 63   02 00   02 37 00 00   Set OFF BE EF   03   06 00   B6 D6   0
35.   a572f60c  from the projector   3  Bind the random 8 bytes    a572f60c    and the authentication password   password  and it becomes  a572f60cpassword    4  Digest this bind  a572f60cpassword  with MD5 algorithm   It will be  e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde    5  Add this  e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde  in front of the commands and  send the data   Send  e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde   command   6  When the sending data is correct  the command will be performed and the  reply data will be returned  Otherwise  an authentication error will be returned     NOTE   As for the transmission of the second or subsequent commands   the authentication data can be omitted when the same connection     14    NetwonktBnidge  Communication    This projector is equipped with NETWORK BRIDGE function    When the projector connects to the computer by LAN communicaton  an external  device that is connected with this projector by RS 232C communication can be  controlled from the computer as a network terminal    For details  see the 3 7 Controlling the external device via the projector using  the NETWORK BRIDGE function    Network Guide     Connection  1 Connect the computer s LAN port and the projector s LAN port with a LAN    cable     2 Connect the projectors CONTROL port and the RS 232C port of the    devices that you want to control with a RS 232C cable    3 Turn the computer on  and after the computer has started up turn the projector    on    Set the COMMUNICATION TYPE to NETWORK BR
36.   accessories  Route a cable so that it is neither stepped on nor pinched out    ACAUTION PDo not turn on or off the projector while connected to a device   in operation  unless that is directed in the manual of the device     gt  Be careful not to mistakenly connect a connector to a wrong port     gt  Before connecting the projector to a network  be sure to obtain the consent of   the administrator of the network     gt  Do not connect the LAN port to any network that might have the excessive   voltage     gt  Before removing the USB storage device from the port of the projector  be   sure to use the REMOVE USB function on the thumbnail screen to secure your   data     NOTE   If aloud feedback noise is produced from the speaker  move the    microphone away from the speaker     This projector doesn t support plug in power for the microphone        Connecting power supply    1 Put the connector of the power cord into the    AC IN  AC inlet  of the projector     2 Firmly plug the power cord s plug into the    outlet  In a couple of seconds after the       ENGLISH B    power supply connection  the POWER indicator E  will light up in steady orange   Please remember that when the DIRECT POWER ON P4    function activated  the connection of the power supply  make the projector turn on        AC IN Power cord    AWARNING    Please use extra caution when connecting the power cord  as  incorrect or faulty connections may result in fire and or electrical shock      Only use the power co
37.   button         4  Point at the LAMP TIME using the V A button  then press the  gt  button  A dialog will appear    5  Press the  gt  button to select    OK    on the dialog  It performs resetting the lamp time     NOTE   Please reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp   for a suitable indication about the lamp     85       Replacing the lamp  continued     Lamp warning  A HIGH VOLTAGE A   HIGH TEMPERATURE HIGH PRESSURE    ANWARNING     The projector uses a high pressure mercury glass lamp  The lamp  can break with a loud bang  or burn out  if jolted or scratched  handled while hot  or  worn over time  Note that each lamp has a different lifetime  and some may burst or  burn out soon after you start using them  In addition  if the bulb bursts  it is possible  for shards of glass to fly into the lamp housing  and for gas containing mercury and  dust containing fine particles of glass to escape from the projector s vent holes     gt  About disposal of a lamp  This product contains a mercury lamp  do not put  itin a trash  Dispose of it in accordance with environmental laws      For lamp recycling  go to www lamprecycle org  in the US       For product disposal  consult your local government agency   or www eiae org  in the US  or www epsc ca  in Canada     For more information  call your dealer           f the lamp should break  it will make a loud bang when it does    unplug the power cord from the outlet  and make sure to request a  replacement lamp from your
38.   e This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN  USB TYPE A  USB TYPE B  or HDMI port    22             Correcting the keystone distortions KEYSTONE button    1    2     Press KEYSTONE button on the remote       control  A dialog will appear on the screen  to aid you in correcting the distortion     Use the A Y cursor buttons to select AUTO or MANUAL  operation  and press the  gt  button to perform the following    1  AUTO executes automatic vertical keystone correction    2  MANUAL displays a dialog for keystone correction    Use the  lt   gt  buttons for adjustment   To close the dialog and complete this operation  press  KEYSTONE button again  Even if you do not do anything  the  dialog will automatically disappear after a few seconds           e The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs  For some input   this function may not work well    e When V INVERT or H amp V INVERT is selected to the MIRROR item in the  SETUP menu  if the projector screen is inclined or angled downward   automatic vertical keystone correction may not work correctly    e When the zoom adjustment is set to the TELE  telephoto focus   this function  may be excessive  This function should be used when the zoom adjustment  is set to the full WIDE  wide angle focus  whenever possible    e When the projector is placed on the level  about  4     the automatic keystone  distortion correction may not work    e When the projector is inclined to near  30 degree or over  this funct
39.   eH        aL    lt GET gt Read projector  internal setup value   bL   aL     aH    02h   00h    DL     DH    00h   00h   bH        INCREMENT    Increment setup value  aL     aH    04h   00h    bL    bH   00h   00h    bL  bH   by 1    lt DECREMENT gt   Decrement setup value  aL     aH    05h   00h    bL    bH   00h   00h    bL  bH   by 1    lt EXECUTE gt  Run a  command   bL  bH   EN     Header code   Packet   Data size   Set  BEh  EFh  03h  06h  00h  to byte number 0   4     CRC flag   For byte number 5  6  refer to RS 232C Communication   Network command  table    17      Action   Set functional code to byte number 7  8    lt SET gt     01h  00h     GET      02h  00h     INCREMENT     04h  00h    lt DECREMENT gt     05h  00h    lt EXECUTE gt     06h  00h   Refer to the Communication command table  above      Type   Setting code   For byte number 9  12  refer to RS 232C Communication   Network command  table    117         3  Response code   Error code   h  shows hexadecimal    1  ACK reply   06h  When the projector receives the Set  Increment  Decrement or Execute  command correctly  the projector changes the setting data for the specified  item by  Type   and it returns the code    2  NAK reply   15h  When the projector cannot understand the received command  the projector  returns the error code   In such a case  check the sending code and send the same command again    3  Error reply   1Ch   0000h  When the projector cannot execute the received command for any reasons  
40.   el  procedure  417   please push the shutdown switch using MET VET    a pin or similar  and disconnect the power plug from the  power outlet  Before turning it on again  wait at least 10  minutes to make the projector cool down enough     Resetting all settings    When it is hard to correct some wrong settings  the FACTORY RESET function of  SERVICE item in OPTION menu  159  can reset all settings  except settings such  as LANGUAGE  LAMP TIME  FILTER TIME  FILTER MESSAGE  SECURITY and  NETWORK  to the factory default     94       Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects    About the phenomenon confused with a machine defect  check and cope with it  according to the following table     Phenomenon    Cases not involving a machine defect    Reference  page          Power does not  come on     Neither sounds  nor pictures are  outputted     The electrical power cord is not plugged in   Correctly connect the power cord     The main power source has been interrupted during    operation such as by a power outage  blackout   etc     Please disconnect the power plug from the power outlet   and allow the projector to cool down at least 10 minutes   then turn the power on again     14       Either there is no lamp and or lamp cover  or either  of these has not been properly fixed    Please turn the power off and disconnect the power  plug from the power outlet  and allow the projector to  cool down at least 45 minutes  After the projector has  sufficiently cooled 
41.  00   11 20 03 00  COMPUTER IN2 S    SYNC ON G OFF   BE EF   03   06 00   A2 D6   01 00   11 20 02 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   F1 D7   02 00   11 20 00 00  OFF BE EF   03   06 00   3B C2   01 00   50 30 00 00  ma ena pa ON BE EF   03   06 00   AB C3   01 00   50 30 01 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   08 C2   02 00   50 30 00 00  OFF BE EF   03   06 00   0B C3   01 00   54 30 00 00  aie angie F ON BE EF   03   06 00   9B C2   01 00   54 30 01 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   38 C3   02 00   54 30 00 00  OFF BEEF   03   0600   7FC2   0100 53 30 00 00  rca alee ON BEEF   03   0600   EFC3   0100 53 30 01 00  Get BEEF   03   0600   4CC2   0200 53 30 00 00  AUTO   KEYSTONE V Execute BE EF   03   06 00   E5 D1   06 00   OD 20 00 00   EXECUTE  Get BE EF   03   06 00   B9 D3   02 00   07 20 00 00  KEYSTONE V Increment BE EF   03   06 00   DF D3   04 00   07 20 00 00  Decrement BE EF   03   06 00   OE D2   05 00   07 20 00 00  KEYSTONE V Execute BE EF   03   06 00   08 DO   06 00   OC 70 00 00   Reset   OFF BEEF   03   0600 FB 27   0100 10 33 00 00  po i set ON BEEF   03   0600 6B 26 01 00 10 33 01 00  Get BEEF   03   0600   C827   0200 10 33 00 00  Set NORMAL BE EF   03   06 00   3B 23   01 00   00 33 00 00  ECO MODE ECO BE EF   03   06 00   AB 22   01 00   00 33 01 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   08 23   02 00   00 33 00 00  NORMAL BE EF   03   06 00   C7 D2   01 00   01 30 00 00  Set H INVERT BE EF   03   06 00   57 D3   01 00   01 30 01 00  MIRROR V INVERT BE EF   03   06 00   A7 D3   01 00 
42.  00   C7 EB   0100   A1 30   24 00   5 CUSTOM BE EF   03   06 00   C7 FF   01 00   A1 30   14 00   6DEFAULT   BE EF   03   06 00   57 EA   0100   A1 30   25 00   6 CUSTOM BE EF   03   06 00   57 FE   01 00   A1 30   15 00   Get BE EF   03   06 00   F4 FO   02 00   A1 30   00 00   Off BE EF   03   06 00   FB FA   01 00   8030   00 00   9 steps gray scale   BE EF   03   06 00   6B FB   01 00   80 30   01 00   Pee A 15 steps gray scale  BE EF   03   06 00   9B FB   01 00   8030   02 00   Ramp BE EF   03   06 00   0B FA   01 00   80 30   03 00   Get BE EF   03   06 00   C8 FA   02 00   80 30   00 00   Get BE EF  03   06 00   08 FE   02 00   9030   00 00   Hel CIR Increment BE EF   03   06 00   6E FE   04 00   9030   00 00   Decrement BE EF   03   06 00   BF FF   05 00   90 30   00 00   Bonds Execute BE EF   03   06 00   58 C2   06 00   50 70   00 00   Get BE EF   03   06 00   F4 FF   02 00   91 30   00 00   ee Me Increment BE EF   03   06 00   92 FF   0400   91 30   00 00   Decrement BE EF   03   06 00   43 FE   05 00   91 30   00 00   B Samma Execute BE EF   03   06 00   A4 c3   06 oo   51 70   00 00   Get BE EF   03   06 00   Bo FF   02 00   92 30   00 00   ga Increment BE EF   03   06 00   D6 FF   04 00   92 30   00 00   Decrement BE EF   03   06 00   07 FE   05 00   92 30   00 00   PCI Execute BE EF   03   06 00   Eo c3   06 00   52 70   00 00   Get BE EF   03   06 00   4C FE   02 00   9330   00 00   xx s Increment BE EF   03   06 00   22 FE   04 00   93 30   00 00   Decremen
43.  0600   8FCE   0400   6B20 00 00  Decrement BEEF   03   0600   5ECF   0500   6B20 00 00   Get BEEF   03   0600   45CC   0200 66 20 00 00   ee aie Incremen BEEF   03   0600   23CC   0400 66 20 00 00  Decrement BEEF   03   0600   F2CD   0500 66 20 00 00   Get BEEF   03   0600   9DCF   0200   6C 20 00 00   EE Pu Incremen BEEF   03   0600   FBCF   0400   6C 20 00 00  Decrement BEEF   03   0600   2ACE   0500   6C 20 00 00   Get BE EF   03   06 00   D9 CF   02 00   6F 20 00 00   pee Incremen BE EF   03   06 00   BF CF   04 00   6F 20 00 00  Decrement BE EF   03   06 00   6E CE   05 00   6F 20 00 00   OFF BE EF   03   06 00   46 D3   01 00   02 20 00 00   MUTE iie ON BE EF   03   06 00   D6 D2   01 00   02 20 01 00   Get BE EF   03   06 00   75 D3   02 00   02 20 00 00   ON BE EF   03   06 00   FE D4   01 00   1C 20 01 00   SPEAKER Set OFF BE EF   03   06 00   6E D5   01 00   1C 20 00 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   5D D5   02 00   1C 20 00 00   AUDIO IN1 BE EF   03   06 00   6E DC   01 00   30 20 01 00   AUDIO Set AUDIO IN2 BE EF   03   06 00   9E DC   01 00   30 20 02 00  SOURCE   AUDIO IN3 BE EF   03   06 00   OE DD   01 00   30 20 03 00  COMPUTER IN1 OFF BE EF   03   06 00   FE DD   01 00   30 20 00 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   CD DD  02 00   30 20 00 00   AUDIO IN1 BE EF   03   06 00   5bE DD   01 00   34 20 01 00   AUDIO Set AUDIO IN2 BE EF   03   06 00   AE DD   01 00   34 20 02 00  SOURCE   AUDIO IN3 BE EF   03   06 00   3E DC   01 00   34 20 03 00  COMPUTER IN2 OFF BE EF   03 
44.  1 Press BLANK button on the remote control     The BLANK screen will be displayed instead of the screen of       input signal  Please refer to BLANK item in SCREEN menu 5500   144   QQQQ  To exit from the BLANK screen and return to the input signal je OO C  Screen  press BLANK button again  E LQ   OO OJO    e The projector automatically exits from the BLANK mode when  some control buttons are pressed     NOTE   The sound is not connected with the BLANK screen function  If  necessary  set the volume or mute first  To display the BLANK screen and mute  the sound at one time  use AV MUTE function    153         25    Using the menu function    This projector has the following menus    PICTURE  IMAGE  INPUT  SETUP  AUDIO  SCREEN  OPTION  NETWORK   SECURITY and EASY MENU    EASY MENU consists of functions often used  and the other menus are classified  into each purpose and brought together as the ADVANCED MENU    Each of these menus is operated using the same methods  While the projector   is displaying any menu  the MENU button on the projector works as the cursor  buttons  The basic operations of these menus are as follows     ENTER button MENU button  Cursor buttons       ESC button RESET button    1 To start the MENU  press the MENU button  The MENU you last used  EASY    or ADVANCED  will appear  EASY MENU has priority to appear just after  powered on     2 In the EASY MENU       1  Use the A Y cursor buttons to select an item to  operate  If you want to change it to the AD
45.  11 20 2009 2 19 41 PM  The currently selected profile data for the My Mee   en   tuin    Connection is shown with a check mark in  MEE azn      the list  energy 192 n 101 11 30 2009 3 23 24 PM  Projector 192 168 1103 11 30 2009 32124 PM  Configure Network Settings Manly   3  Select one of the profile data listed in the CS   a es       window and put a mark in the check box   The data selected before is turned          u n ma rked    Proe 10 100Mbps PCI Ethernet Adapter  Oroi  10 100Mboss PCI Ethernet Adapter  4  Click the  OK   then the window is closed   If you don t want to select a new one  click  the  Cancel            Lo      o      NOTE   If you don t want to use the My Connection  mark no data listed in the  window  and click the  OK      In the list  all profile data are shown no matter which network adapter is    selected  You can register a profile data that is not for currently selected  network adapter as the My Connection profile data        35    1 9 Profile data  continued     Also  you can register a profile data to My  Connection  when the network connection         Projector name   PR  0123456789ab         is established  When it is established  the Muni re E   Connection to Projector successful  screen is  displayed     430  QE    If you wish to use the current connection  setting for My Connection  check in the box for  the  Register this setting to My Connection    And then  if it is okay to overwrite the present  data for My Connection  click the  OK   
46.  2 BEEF   03   0600   5AC2   0100   0035 02 00  MY IMAGE     IMAGE 3 BEEF   03   0600   CAC3   0100   0035 03 00  IMAGE 4 BEEF   03   0600   FAC1   0100   0035 04 00  Get BEEF   03   0600   09C3   0200   0035 00 00  MY IMAGE  IMAGE Dele Execute BEEF   03   0600   71C3   0600   0135 00 00  MY IMAGE  Execut BEEF   03   0600   35C3   0600   0235 00 00  IMAGE 2 Delete TUM  MY IMAGE  NACE S Doi Execute BEEF   03   0600   c9c2   0600   0335 00 00  Ny IMAGE Execute BEEF   03   0600   BDC3   0600   0435 00 00    IMAGE  Delete                               29       PJllimk  commatd       Commands    Control Description    Parameter or Response          POWR    Power Contorol    0   Standby       1   Power On       POWR      Power Status inquiry    0   Standby       1   Power On       2   Cool Down       INPT    Input Source selection    11   COMPUTER IN 1       12   COMPUTER IN 2       21   COMPONENT       22   S VIDEO       23   VIDEO       31   HDMI  41   USB TYPE A       51   LAN       52   USB TYPEB       INPT      Input Source inquiry    11 2 COMPUTER IN 1       12   COMPUTER IN 2       21   COMPONENT       22   S VIDEO       23   VIDEO       31   HDMI  41   USB TYPEA       51   LAN       52   USB TYPE B       AVMT    AV Mute    10   BLANK off       11   BLANK on       20   Mute off       21   Mute on       30   AV Mute off       31   AV Mute on       AVMT            AV Mute inquiry    10   BLANK off       11   BLANK on       20   Mute off       21   Mute on          30   AV Mute
47.  3 1 Follow the procedure in 1 1 to display the MY TEXT PASSWORD on off  menu    3 2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box  large   The 10 digit  inquiring code will be displayed inside the box    3 3 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit inquiring code  Your password will  be sent after your user registration information is confirmed         continued on next page     71    Description          72    MY TEXT  DISPLAY    MY TEXT  WRITING     1  Use the A    buttons on the SECURITY menu to  select the MY TEXT DISPLAY and press the    or  ENTER button to display the MY TEXT DISPLAY    on off menu      2  Use the A Y buttons on the MY TEXT DISPLAY on off m  on or off     ON  amp  OFF    When it is set ON  the MY TEXT will be displayed  on the START UP screen and the INPUT    INFORMATION when the INFORMATION on the  SERVICE menu is chosen      This function is available only when the MY TEXT  PASSWORD function is set to the OFF      1  Use the A V buttons on the  SECURITY menu to select the MY  TEXT WRITING and press the  gt   button  The MY TEXT WRITING dialog  will be displayed    2  The current MY TEXT will be displayed  on the first 3 lines  If not yet written  the  lines will be blank   Use the A V 4    buttons and the  ENTER or INPUT button to select and  enter characters  To erase 1 character  at one time  press the RESET button or  press the  lt  and INPUT button at the  same time  Also if you move the cursor  to DELETE or ALL CLEAR on screen  and press the ENTER o
48.  EF   03   06 00   C2 F5   01 00   B1 20 00 00   MONITOR OUT   Set  COMPUTER IN2   BE EF   03   06 00   02 F7   01 00   B1 20 04 00    VIDEO OFF BE EF   03   06 00   32 B4   01 00   B1 20 FF 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   F1 F5   02 00   B1 20 00 00   COMPUTER1 BEEF   03   0600 7A F4 01 00 B3 20 00 00   COMPUTER2 BEEF   03   0600   BAF6   0100 B3 20 04 00   ea dnd   COMPUTER IN 3   BEEF   03   0600   4AF6 01 00 B3 20 07 00  OFF BEEF   03   0600   8AB5   0100 B3 20 FF 00   Get BEEF   03   0600 49 F4 02 00 B3 20 00 00   COMPUTER1 BEEF   03   0600 1A F6 0100   BB 20 00 00   MONITOR OUT   Set  COMPUTER2 BEEF   03   0600   DAF4   0100   BB 20 04 00    LAN OFF BEEF   03   0600   EAB7   0100   BB20 FF 00   Get BEEF   03   0600 29 F6 0200   BB 20 00 00   COMPUTER1 BEEF   03   0600 B6 F4   0100 B6 20 00 00   MONITOR OUT   Set  COMPUTER2 BEEF   03   0600 76 F6 01 00 B6 20 04 00  USB TYPEA OFF BEEF   03   0600   46B5   0100 B6 20 FF 00  Get BEEF   03   0600 85 F4 02 00 B6 20 00 00   COMPUTER1 BEEF   03   0600   6EF7   0100   BC 20 00 00   MONITOR OUT   Set  COMPUTER2 BEEF   03   0600   AEF5   0100   BC 20 04 00    USB TYPE B OFF BEEF   03   0600   9EB6   0100   BC 20 FF 00  Get BEEF   03   0600   5DF7   0200   BC 20 00 00   COMPUTER IN1   BE EF   03   06 00   2A F7   01 00   BF 20 00 00   MONITOR OUT   Set  COMPUTER IN2   BE EF   03   06 00   EA F5   01 00   BF 20 04 00    STANDBY OFF BE EF   03   06 00   DA B6   01 00   BF 20 FF 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   19 F7   02 00   BF 20 00 00   
49.  FUINGiOnsS  7 1 E mail Alerts    The projector can automatically send an alert message to the specified e mail  addresses when the projector detects a certain condition that is requiring  maintenance or detected an error     NOTE   Up to five e mail addresses can be specified     The projector may be not able to send e mail if the projector suddenly loses       power     Mail Settings    152     To use the projector s e mail alert function  please configure the following items  through a web browser     Example  If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10    1  Enter    http   192 168 1 10     into the address bar of the web browser    2  Enter your user name and password  and then click the  OK     3  Click the  Mail Settings  and configure each item  Refer to item 3 5 Mail  Settings  L52  for further information    4  Click the  Apply  button to save the settings     NOTE   Click the  Send Test Mail  button in the  Mail Settings  to confirm  that the e mail settings are correct  The following mail will be delivered to the       specified addresses     Subject line  Test Mail   Projector name    Text  Send Test Mail  Date   Testing date    Time   Testing time    IP Address   Projector IP address      MAC Address       Projector MAC address gt     78    7 1 E mail Alerts  Continued     5  Click the  Alert Settings  on the main menu to configure the E mail Alerts  settings    6  Select and configure each alert item  Refer to item 3 6 Alert Setting  1153  for  fu
50.  Plc seii Rf sui SSSI   e While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION retos  menu  the projector will keep checking every port sequentially   till an input signal is detected  R450   If VIDEO button is Oc                 pressed when COMPUTER IN1 or COMPUTER IN2 port is  selected  the projector will check HDMI port first     1 Press the MY SOURCE   DOC  CAMERA button on MY SOURCE      the remote control  The input signal will be changed DOC  CAMERA button  into the signal you set as MY SOURCE  54   aa     e This function also can use for document camera  Select the SoB  input port that connected the document camera  OOOQ       Posmon                19    Searching an input signal SEARCH button    1 Press SEARCH button on the remote control     The projector will start to check its input ports as below in  order to find any input signals   When an input is found  the projector will stop searching  and display the image  If no signal is found  the projector will  return to the state selected before the operation     r COMPUTER IN1  gt  COMPUTER IN2  gt  LAN  x                    VIDEO USB TYPE A    v  S VIDEO USB TYPE B    7    COMPONENT  Y  Cb Pb  Cr Pr      HDMI  lt           e While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION menu    50   the  projector will keep checking the ports in above order repeatedly till an input  signal is detected    e  t may take several seconds to project the images from the USB TYPE B port     Selecting an aspect ratio    1 Press ASPEC
51.  Type  POLSKI BE EF   03   06 00   97 D7   01 00   05 30 OE 00  T  RK  E BE EF   03   06 00   07 D6   01 00   05 30 OF 00  DANSK BE EF   03   06 00   A7 DF   01 00   05 30 11 00  CESKY BE EF   03   06 00   57 DF   01 00   05 30 12 00  MAGYAR BE EF   03   06 00   C7 DE   01 00   05 30 13 00  ROMANA BE EF   03   06 00   F7 DC   01 00   05 30 14 00  SLOVENSKI BE EF   03   06 00   67 DD   01 00   05 30 15 00  Set HRVATSKI BE EF   03   06 00   97 DD   01 00   05 30 16 00  LANGUAGE EAAHNIKA BE EF   03   06 00   07 DC   01 00   05 30 17 00  LIETUVIU BE EF   03   06 00   F7 D9   01 00   05 30 18 00  EESTI BE EF   03   06 00   67 D8   01 00   05 30 19 00  LATVIESU BE EF   03   06 00   97 D8   01 00   05 30 1A 00     nel BE EF   03   06 00   07 D9   01 00   05 30 1B 00  IJJ amp    lJg Vs BE EF   03   06 00   37 DB   01 00   05 30 1C 00  huve  BE EF   03   06 00   A7 DA   01 00   05 30 1D 00  PORTUGU  S BRA  BE EF   03   06 00   57 DA   01 00   05 30 1E 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   C4 D3   02 00   05 30 00 00  NOTE  Not all of the languages in this table are supported   Get BE EF   03   06 00   04 D7   0200   15 30 00 00  Seen H Increment BE EF   03   06 00   62 D7   04 00   15 30 00 00  Decrement BE EF   03   06 00   B3 D6   05 00   15 30 00 00  MENU  POSITION H Execute BE EF   03   06 00   DC C6   06 00   43 70 00 00  Reset  Get BE EF   03   06 00   40 D7   02 00   16 30 00 00  a V Increment BE EF   03   06 00   26 D7   04 00   16 30 00 00  Decrement BE EF   03   06 00   F7 D6   0500 
52.  WRITING menu will be unavailable  which can prevent the  MY TEXT from being overwritten     1 Turning on the MY TEXT PASSWORD  1 1 Use the A Y buttons on the SECURITY menu to  select the MY TEXT PASSWORD and press the   gt  button to display the MY TEXT PASSWORD  on off menu   1 2 Use the A Y buttons on the MY TEXT  PASSWORD on off menu to select ON  The  ENTER NEW PASSWORD box  small  will  be displayed  i  1 3 Use the A     lt     gt  buttons to enter the ENTER NEW PASSWORD  password  Move the cursor to the right side box  small   of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box  small   and press the    gt  button to display the NEW  PASSWORD AGAIN box  and then enter the  same password again   1 4 Move the cursor to the right side of the          MY TEXT NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and press  PASSWORD  gt  button to display the NOTE NEW  PASSWORD box for about 30 seconds  then  please make note of the password during  this time     Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or    button on the  projector will return to the MY TEXT PASSWORD on off menu     2 Turning off the MY TEXT PASSWORD  2 1 Follow the procedure in 1 1 to display the MY TEXT PASSWORD on off  menu   2 2 Select OFF to display the ENTER  PASSWORD box  large   Enter the  registered password and the screen will  return to the MY TEXT PASSWORD on off x  menu  ENTER PASSWORD box  If an incorrect password is input  the menu will close   large   If necessary  repeat the process from 2 1    3 If you have forgotten your password  
53.  after you start using them   Preparation of a new lamp and early replacement are recommended  To prepare  a new lamp  make contact with your dealer and tell the lamp type number     Type number   DT01021  Replacing the lamp    1   2     Turn the projector off  and unplug the power cord   Allow the projector to cool for at least 45 minutes   Prepare a new lamp  If the projector is mounted on  a ceiling  or if the lamp has broken  also ask the  dealer to replace the lamp     lamp cover 3       In case of replacement by yourself  follow the following procedure     N Oo occ A    Loosen the screw  marked by arrow  of the lamp      cover and then slide and lift the lamp cover to the    side to remove it   Loosen the 3 screws  marked by arrow  of the lamp       and slowly pick up the lamp by the handles  Never    loosen any other screws   Insert the new lamp  and retighten firmly the 3      screws of the lamp that are loosened in the previous    process to lock it in place   While putting the interlocking parts of the lamp cover      and the projector together  slide the lamp cover back in    place  Then firmly fasten the screw of the lamp cover   Turn the projector on and reset the lamp time using      the LAMP TIME item in the OPTION menu      1  Press the MENU button to display a menu    2  Point at the ADVANCED MENU in the menu using    the V A button  then press the    button      3  Point at the OPTION in the left column of the menu    using the V A button  then press the  gt
54.  brakes placing the projector on a stand with casters      Do not place the projector in the side up position  the lens up position or  the lens down position      In the case of a ceiling installation or the like  contact your dealer before  installation     2           Disconnect the  plug from the  power outlet     9S          Do not  disassemble     9S     N WARNING    Be cautious of High temperatures of the projector    High temperatures are generated when the lamp is lit  It could result in fire or  burn  Use special caution in households where children are present    Do not touch about the lens  air fans and ventilation openings during use or  immediately after use  to prevent a burn  Take care of ventilation      Keep a space of 30 cm or more between the sides and other objects such  as walls      Do not place the projector on a metallic table or anything weak in heat      Do not place anything about the lens  air fans and ventilation openings of  the projector      Never block the air fan and ventilation openings      Do not cover the projector with a tablecloth  etc      Do not place the projector on a carpet or bedding     Never look through the lens or openings when the lamp is on   The powerful light could adversely affect vision   Use special caution in households where children are present     Use only the correct power cord and the correct power outlet   Incorrect power supply could result in fire or electrical shock      Use only the correct power outlet depe
55.  configurations of the  computer and projector  If  you change the projector s  settings  turn off the  projector s AC power and  then turn it on again  If you  simply put the projector in  STANDBY power mode and  then turn it on again  the new  settings might not take effect        Firewall software other than  Windows Firewall is installed  in your computer     Refer to the manual for the  firewall software and take  one of the following actions     Exclude the  LiveViewer   from blocking item list     Disable the firewall while  using the    LiveViewer             Can t  communicate    The computer and or  projector s network settings  are not configured correctly     Check the network  configurations of the  computer and projector        The projector input port isn t  switched to LAN     Check the projector s input  port setting      18   19          An access point is used  and  your computer is connected  to the access point via  wireless LAN      continued on next page        Use network utilities that may  come with your computer   or wireless LAN card to  establish wireless network  connection  For detail    refer to the manual of the  computer or the card             User s Manual   Operating Guide    89    8  Troubleshooting  Continued     Problem    Likely Cause    Things to Check    Reference  Page  Number          z  oy     o  3  P  V     D  n  D  3  L   t     o       90    The projected  image is rather  slow compared  to that of the  computer    The projector
56.  connect using  Connect button  of  the  LiveViewer    EclUsing the    LiveViewer    in the User s  Manual   Network Guide     The horizontal or vertical frequency of the input signal is  dU LL  not within the specified range   ub Please confirm the specs for your projector or the signal  Source specs     An improper signal is input       Please confirm the specs for your projector or the signal  Source specs         continued on next page     91    Related messages  continued     Message    Description          CHECK THE AIR FLOW       92    The internal temperature is rising    Please turn the power off  and allow the projector to cool  down at least 20 minutes  After having confirmed the  following items  please turn the power ON again    e Is there blockage of the air passage aperture       s the air filter dirty      Does the peripheral temperature exceed 35 C    If the same indication is displayed after the remedy  please  set FAN SPEED of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu  to HIGH    A note of precaution when cleaning the air filter    Please immediately turn the power off  and clean or change  the air filter referring to the  Cleaning and replacing the   air filter  section of this manual  After you have cleaned or  changed the air filter  please be sure to reset the filter timer   0252 87      Regarding the indicator lamps    When operation of the LAMP  TEMP and POWER indicators differs from usual   check and cope with it according to the following table     POWER 
57.  continued     W A network connection could not be established     Windows prevented network configuration  changes     You may log in the Windows under User  authority     Click the  OK   then the  LiveViewer  main  menu is displayed even though the network  is not established  Click   on the main and  go back to item 1 5 Selecting the network  connection method   114        Consult to the network administrator  Log in the Windows under Administrator  authority  After that  please resume at item 1 3 2 Starting the  LiveViewer         19     E  f you need to add a Network configuration on your computer to connect to the  projector        This dialog will be displayed when you    Do you want to apply suggested network settings as follows     need to add a Network configuration on Padies 121681105  your computer to connect to the projector  Samimek zmzmzeo  _ wos     Confirm with your network administrator if I Nt delana corfrmuton dl for adang Network sutras    the Network configuration displayed on the  dialog is OK  and then click the  Yes      Click the  NO   then the  LiveViewer  main menu is displayed even though the  network is not established  Click 4 on the main menu and go back to item 1 5  Selecting the network connection method   114     1 5 Selecting the network connection method  continued     If you put a check mark in the box  Not displaying confirmation dialog for adding  Network settings   the projector memorizes current configuration and this dialog  is not d
58.  cover          AWARNING P Be careful of handling a battery  as a battery can cause  explosion  cracking or leakage  which could result in a fire  an injury  and  environment pollution      Use only the specified and perfect battery  Do not use a battery with damage   such as a scratch  a dent  rust or leakage      When replacing the battery  replace it with a new battery      When a battery leaked  wipe the leakage out well with a waste cloth  If the  leakage adhered to your body  immediately rinse it well with water  When a battery  leaked in the battery holder  replace the batteries after wiping the leakage out      Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading a  battery      Do not work on a battery  for example recharging or soldering      Keep a battery in a dark  cool and dry place  Never expose a battery to a fire  or water      Keep a battery away from children and pets  Be careful for them not to swallow  a battery  If swallowed consult a physician immediately for emergency treatment     Obey the local laws on disposing a battery     16    Using the CD manual    The other manuals for this product are written into the included CD ROM titled   User s Manual  detailed    Before using the CD ROM  please read the following i  to ensure the proper use        E System requirements    The system for using the CD ROM requires the following   Windows    OS Microsoft  Windows  98  Windows  98SE   Windows NT  4 0  Windows   Me   Windows  2000 Window
59.  currently in use  Presenting  by another user        The projector you want to send your images    Th   projector  amp  currently in use  Presenting  by another    to is occupied by another computer in the user  You cannot connect weh this projector unti the other  Presenter mode     Click the  OK   then the    LiveViewer    main  menu is displayed in stand by mode  Retry  to send your images  after the Presenter  mode is off     30    1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination  continued     W A Slideshow is currently running on the projector that you are trying to display to        The projector you want to send your images    A Sideshow 6 currently running on the projector that you    to is in the Slideshow mode in the PC LESS are tring to degay to  PC Less Presentation Mode      Tf you continue  you wil cancel the current Sideshow     Presentation       Click the  Yes   then the projector will stop  the Slideshow and switch the input source  to the LAN port      Click the  No   then the projector is EEG MCN   remained in the Slideshow mode  and the    LiveViewer  main menu is displayed in   stand by mode on your computer     E Are you sure you want to change the input channel of the Projector to LAN        The projector is not set to the LAN as an T    X  input signal  Va     Click the  Yes   then the projector is   switched to the LAN       Click the  No   then the projector is  remained as it is  and the  LiveViewer      m  main menu is displayed in stand by mod
60.  different  lifetime  and some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them   Preparation of a new lamp and early replacement are recommended  To prepare  a new lamp  make contact with your dealer and tell the lamp type number     Type number   DT01021    1 Turn the projector off  and unplug the power cord     Allow the projector to cool for at least 45 minutes  Lampcover 3    2 Prepare a new lamp  If the projector is mounted on   a ceiling  or if the lamp has broken  also ask the  dealer to replace the lamp    In case of replacement by yourself  follow the following   procedure    Loosen the screw  marked by arrow  of the lamp    cover and then slide and lift the lamp cover to the  side to remove it    4 Loosen the 3 screws  marked by arrow  of the    lamp  and slowly pick up the lamp by the handles   Never loosen any other screws    5 Insert the new lamp  and retighten firmly the    3 screws of the lamp that are loosened in the  previous process to lock it in place        ENGLISH E    6 While putting the interlocking parts of the lamp    cover and the projector together  slide the lamp  cover back in place  Then firmly fasten the screw of  the lamp cover    7 Turn the projector on and reset the lamp time    using the LAMP TIME item in the OPTION menu     1  Press the MENU button to display a menu     2  Point at the ADVANCED MENU in the menu using the  V A button  then press the  gt  button     3  Point at the OPTION in the left column of the menu using  the V Abut
61.  display  the guidance by pressing the RESET button on the remote three  seconds or more when MAP1 or MAP2 appears         continued on next page     48    Description          C C    Closed Caption     The C C  is the function that displays a   transcript or dialog of the audio portion of   a video  files or other presentation or other   relevant sounds  It is required to have NTSC   format video or 480i 60 format component   video source supporting C C  feature to   utilize this function    It may not work properly  depending on equipment or signal source   In this case  please turn off the Closed Caption        DISPLAY  Select Closed Caption DISPLAY setting from following options using  A Y buttons     AUTO   4   ON  amp  OFF  L____f    AUTO   Closed Caption automatically displays when the volume  is muted    ON   Closed Caption is on    OFF   Closed Caption is off     The caption is not displayed when the OSD menu is active     The Closed Caption is the function to display the dialogue   narration  and   or sound effects of a television program or other  video sources  The Closed Caption availability is depending upon  broadcaster and or content        MODE  Select Closed Caption MODE setting from following options using  A Y buttons    CAPTIONS  amp  TEXT   CAPTIONS   Display Closed Caption    TEXT   Display Text data  which is for additional information such  as news reports or a TV program guide  The information  covers the entire screen  Not all of the C C  program ha
62.  editing is completed   If you don t want to store it  click the  Cancel      6  The edited profile data is stored and shown  in the profile list with the new date created  information  if you click the  OK            Projector Connection       Select the manual connection method you wouk ihe to usar       Projector name IP address Last connected       Projector 1 192 168 1 101 11 30 2009 3 23 24 PM  Proyector  192 168 1 102 11 0 2009 3 22 24 PM  Projector 3 192 168 1103 11 30 2009 3 21 24 PM       C Configure Network Settings Manual       Gak   Comet   ot         Profe name        Profe 1  Adapter name   11a b Q Wroless LAN Mri PCI Express Adaptor  Wireless settings           Mode fono    P address Ne 108 1 101     Subnet mask 25  235  235  0  P adden 192   168   1   302  Subrat mask 255   255 255   0    z   w   c         NOTE   When you edit a profile data  it is strongly recommended to check  that the edited data can work properly by selecting the data at the Profile    connection     23        34    1 9 Profile data  continued     1 9 4 Registering My Connection   One of the profile data  which is often used  can be registered as the My  Connection profile data  Once the data is registered  all you need to do is to select  the My Connection to connect to the network   12        1  Click the  My Connection      Sudixct  the manual connection method you woud Mar to usar                   Profi  2  The  Add My Connection  screen will come molam     i DOn         u p Pro  e 2
63.  enable JavaScript     It is recommended that all web browser updates are installed        45    3 1 Logon    To use the Web Control function  you need to logon with your user name and  password   447   Refer to the following for configuring or controlling the projector via a web browser     Example  If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10     1  Display the logon window as shown on the right  fETTTTOREPXTTNT   There are two options to display this window       Using the  LiveViewer  FOA   Connect your computer and the projector   via Network using the    LiveViewer      L9    The server 192 168 1 10 at Web Server Authentication    requires a username and password     Then click the Web Control button  amp  on URP    pz        Warning  This server is requesting that your username and  the LiveViewer main menu  3 7  to password be sent in an insecure manner  basic authentication  without a secure connection    start the Web browser software        User name      v             Password     Q Using Web browser software  Remember my password  Make sure that your computer and the  projector is connected via network  and    then start Web browser   Enter the projector s IP address into URL  input box of the Web browser as the example below  and then press the  Enter key or  gt  button    Example  If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10   Enter  http   192 168 1 10   into the address bar of the web  browser and press the Enter key or click      bu
64.  f you observe a leakage of the battery  wipe out the flower and then  replace the battery  If the flower adheres your body or clothes  rinse well with  water      Obey the local laws on disposing the battery      N CAUTION    Be careful in moving the projector    Neglect could result in an injury or damage      Do not move the projector during use  Before moving  disconnect the  power cord and all external connections  and close the slide lens door or  attach the lens cap      Avoid any impact or shock to the projector      Do not drag the projector      For moving the projector  use the enclosed case or bag if provided     Do not put anything on top of the projector    Placing anything on the projector could result in loss of balance or falling   and cause an injury or damage  Use special caution in households where  children are present     Do not attach anything other than specified things to the projector   Neglect could result in an injury or damage      Some projector has a screw thread in a lens part  Do not attach anything  other than specified options  such as conversion lens  to the screw thread     Avoid a smoky  humid or dusty place    Placing the projector in a smoke  a highly humid  dusty place  oily soot or  corrosive gas could result in fire or electrical shock      Do not place the projector near a smoky  humid or dusty place  ex   a smoking space  a kitchen  a beach  etc    Do not place the projector  outdoors      Do not use a humidifier near the projector
65.  gt  cursor button or ENTER to rotate the selected    image 90 degrees clockwise  This setting information will be  saved in the  playlist txt  file  2871      STOP    ROTATE       75    PC LESS Presentation  continued   Operating by the menu on the Thumbnail screen    You can also control the images by using the menu on the Thumbnail screen     Functions          Moves to an upper folder     Allows you to sort files and folders as following     RETURN SS  gt  cursor button or ENTER to return to the Thumbnail     gt     RETURN cue  gt  cursor button or ENTER to return to the Thumbnail    Be sure to use this function before removing USB storage device  from the projector  After that  the projector will not recognize a  USB storage device until you insert it again into the USB TYPE A  input port          REMOVE USB       SORT    76    PC LESS Presentation  continued     NOTE     These operations are not accessible while the projector OSD is displayed     The Thumbnail mode shows 20 pictures in 1 page as maximum       t is not possible to change the input port by using the INPUT button when the  Thumbnail screen  Slideshow  or Full Screen is displayed      Some error icons will be displayed in the Thumbnail     This file seems to be broken or not supported format     A file that cannot be displayed on the thumbnail screen is  indicated by a file format icon        77    PC LESS Presentation  continued   Full Screen Mode    The Full Screen mode shows a full display image  To disp
66.  indicator    LAMP  indicator    TEMP  indicator    Description          Lighting  In Orange    Turned  off    Turned  off    The projector is in a standby state   Please refer to the section  Power on off         Blinking  In Green    Turned  off    Turned  off    The projector is warming up   Please wait        Lighting  In Green    Turned  off    Turned  off    The projector is in an on state   Ordinary operations may be performed        Blinking  In Orange    Turned  off    Turned  off    The projector is cooling down   Please wait        Blinking  In Red     discre   tionary      discre   tionary     The projector is cooling down  A certain error  has been detected    Please wait until POWER indicator finishes blinking   and then perform the proper measure using the item  descriptions below        Blinking  In Red  or  Lighting  In Red    Lighting  In Red    Turned  off    The lamp does not light  and there is a possibility  that interior portion has become heated    Please turn the power off  and allow the projector to  cool down at least 20 minutes  After the projector has  sufficiently cooled down  please make confirmation of  the following items  and then turn the power on again     Is there blockage of the air passage aperture       s the air filter dirty      Does the peripheral temperature exceed 35  C    If the same indication is displayed after the remedy   please change the lamp referring to the section   Replacing the lamp         Blinking  In Red  or  Lightin
67.  is set to 10     This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN  USB TYPE A   USB TYPE B or HDMI port      continued on next page     34    Description          H PHASE    AUTO ADJUST  EXECUTE    Using the  lt   gt  buttons adjusts the horizontal phase to eliminate flicker   Right  gt  Left      This item can be selected only for a computer signal or a  component video signal  This function is unavailable for a signal  from the LAN  USB TYPE A  USB TYPE B or HDMI port     Using the  lt  P gt  buttons adjusts the horizontal size   Small  amp  Large      This item can be selected only for a computer signal  This function  is unavailable for a signal from the LAN  USB TYPE A  USB TYPE  B or HDMI port      When this adjustment is excessive  the picture may not be  displayed correctly  In such a case  please reset the adjustment   by pressing the RESET button on the remote control during this  operation      Images might appear degraded when this function is operated  but  itis not a malfunction     Selecting this item performs the automatic adjustment feature    For a computer signal   The vertical position  the horizontal position and the horizontal  phase will be automatically adjusted    Make sure that the application window is set to its maximum size  prior to attempting to use this feature  A dark picture may still be  incorrectly adjusted  Use a bright picture when adjusting    For a video signal and s video signal   The video format best suited for the respective 
68.  isn t capable  of relaying dynamic images  such as PowerPoint amp   animation at full speed     Switching the priority to     Transmission Speed    under  the options menu may help  to improve speed     41       The compression rate being  used for transferring the  images is too low     Switching the priority to     Transmission Speed    under  the options menu may help  to improve speed        No Image    Using Photo Gallery Slide  Show in Windows Vista     The  LiveViewer  cannot  send computer screen data  while using Windows Vista  Photo Gallery Slide Show   Please close Photo Gallery  Slide Show before using the   LiveViewer         Can t display  the movies  correctly     In some combinations of  computer s video card and  application software  there is   a possibility that true image    especially movies played by media  player   cannot be transferred to  the projector with the  LiveViewer      If there is a video  acceleration level adjustment  function in your application   please try to adjust it  Refer  your application manual in  detail        Network connection  between the  computer and  projector is  disconnected  when computer  display resolution  is changed   during Network  Presentation     The computer Projector  network connection might be  disconnected when computer  display resolution is changed  while displaying picture     Please re connect using   Connect button  after  changing computer display  resolution  or change display  resolution before conn
69.  lamps      93   Shutting the projector down        94   Resetting all settings             94   Phenomena that may be easy  to be mistaken for machine defects    95   Specifications              99    IMinrodUCtion    Features  The projector provides you with the broad use by the following features     Y This projector has a variety of I O ports that supposedly cover for any  business scene  The HDMI port can support various image equipment  which have digital interface to get clearer pictures on a screen    Y This projector realizes the large projection image  even if in a small space    v If you insert a USB storage device  such as a USB memory  into the USB  TYPE A port and select the port as the input source  you can view images  stored in the device    Y This projector can be controlled and monitored via LAN connection    This projector s network supports the PJLink    standard    Y PJLink    is a unified standard for operating and controlling data projectors   PJLink    enables central control of projectors manufactured by different vendors  and projectors can be operated by a controller  PJLink    compliant equipment  can be managed and controlled at any time and in any place  regardless of  manufacturer    For the command of PJLink    see  Technical    For specifications of PJLink    see the web site of the Japan Business Machine  and Information System Industries Association     URL  http   pjlink jbmia orjp  as of Dec  2009     s    Checking the contents of package
70.  local dealer  Note that shards of glass  could damage the projector s internals  or cause injury during handling       So please do not try to clean the projector or replace the lamp yourself   e If the lamp should break  it will make a loud bang when it does   ventilate the  Disconnect room well  and make sure not to inhale the gas or fine particles that come out  E from the projector s vent holes  and not to get them into your eyes or mouth     Before replacing the lamp  turn the projector off and unplug the power  power      zd  outlet COrd  then wait at least 45 minutes for the lamp to cool sufficiently   Handling the lamp while hot can cause burns  as well as damaging the lamp       Never unscrew except the appointed  marked by an arrow  screws      Do not open the lamp cover while the projector is suspended from   a ceiling  This is dangerous  since if the lamp s bulb has broken  the  Q shards will fall out when the cover is opened  In addition  working in       high places is dangerous  so ask your local dealer to have the lamp  replaced even if the bulb is not broken     Do not use the projector with the lamp cover removed  At the lamp  replacing  make sure that the screws are screwed in firmly  Loose  Screws could result in damage or injury       Use only the lamp of the specified type  Use of a lamp that does not  meet the lamp specifications for this model could cause a fire  damage or  shorten the life of this product    Q    f the lamp breaks soon after the firs
71.  not place anything that  can stick or be sucked to the vents  around the intake vents  Clean the air filter  periodically     gt  Do not use the security bar and slot to prevent the projector from falling down   since it is not designed for it     Control panel     1  STANDBY ON button    217    2  INPUT button    418    3  MENU button    226    It consists of four cursor buttons    4  POWER indicator  L417  93  94    5  TEMP indicator  E2193  94    6  LAMP indicator    193  94     Rear panel    9   13    1  USB TYPE A port                  MIC port     AUDIO IN1 port    AUDIO IN2 port     AUDIO IN3 L R  ports    AUDIO OUT  L R  ports     1   3   4     STANDBY ON INPUT    A e      N     C  j Q        1        5   6            awe     TEMP  i POWER  2   3  4         10  COMPUTER IN1 port   11  COMPUTER IN2 port   12  MONITOR OUT port   13  CONTROL port    14  VIDEO port    15  S VIDEO port    16  Cr Pr Cb Pb Y   Component  ports     10   11   12                                                                             Remote control     1  VIDEO button  2419     2  COMPUTER button    219     3  SEARCH button    20     4  STANDBY ON button  E217    5  ASPECT button  120     6  AUTO button    122     7  BLANK button  125     8  MAGNIFY   ON button    124    9  MAGNIFY   OFF button  24    10  MY SOURCE DOC CAMERA button    2119  54    11  VOLUME   button    1118     12  PAGE UP button    2116     13  PAGE DOWN button    2116    14  VOLUME   button  118     15  MUTE button  218
72.  off  31   AV Mute on        continued on next page     30          Commands    Control Description    Parameter or Response       1st byte  Refers to Fan error  one of 0 to 2       2nd byte  Refers to Lamp error  one of 0 to 2       3rd byte  Refers to Temptrature error  one of 0 to  2       4th byte  Refers to Cover error  one of 0 to 2                                                          ERST   Error Status inquiry 5th byte  Refers to Filter error  one of 0 to 2  6th byte  Refers to Other error  one of 0 to 2  The mearning of 0 to 2 is as given below  0   Error is not detected  1   Warning  2    Error  LAMP   Lamp Status er 1st number  digits 1 to 5   Lamp Time    us inqui  P T 2nd number   0   Lamp off  1   Lamp on  INST   Input Source List inquiry   11 12 21 22 23 31 41 51 52  NAME   Projector Name inquiry ee EM set in PROJECTOR  INF1   Manufucturer s Name HITACHI  inquiry  CP X2011N  CP X2511N  INF2   Model Name inquiry CP X3041N  CP X4011N  INFO   Other Information inquiry scopo with the factory information and so  CLSS   Class Information inquiry   1       NOTE   The password used in PJLink    is the same as the password set in  the Web Brouwser Comtrol  To use PJLink    without authentication  do not set  any password in Web Browser Control       For specifications of PJLink    see the web site of the Japan Business  Machine and Information System Industries Association   URL  http   pjlink jbmia or jp        31       NOTE    The information in this manual is sub
73.  press and hold the INPUT button for 3 seconds while pressing the   gt  button on the projector     2   The 10 digit Inquiring Code will be displayed  Contact your dealer  with the 10 digit Inquiring Code  Your password will be sent after  your user registration information is confirmed      If there is no key input for about 55 seconds while the Inquiring Code is displayed  the menu will   close  If necessary  repeat the process from  1            Description     1  Use the A Y buttons on the SECURITY menu  to select SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE  and press the  gt  button to display the ENTER  NEW PASSWORD box    2  Use the A W  lt   gt  buttons to enter the new password    3  Move the cursor to the right side of the  ENTER NEW PASSWORD box and press the  SECURITY  gt  button to display the NEW PASSWORD  PASSWORD AGAIN box  enter the same password again   CHANGE  4  Move the cursor to the right side of the NEW  PASSWORD AGAIN box and press the  gt   button and the NOTE NEW PASSWORD box  will be displayed for about 30 seconds  please  make note of the password during this time   Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or    button on the  projector will close the NOTE NEW PASSWORD box     Please do not forget your password               continued on next page   67    Description          MyScreen  PASSWORD    The MyScreen PASSWORD function can be used to prohibit access to the  MyScreen function and prevent the currently registered MyScreen image  from being overwritten  
74.  slightly uneven to  the left or right  use the elevator feet to place the projector MEN  horizontally  p   Names ee  Using the feet can also tilt the projector in order to project at a suitable angle to  the screen  elevating the front side of the projector within 14 degrees    This projector has 2 elevator feet and 2 elevator buttons  An elevator foot is  adjustable while pushing the elevator button on the same side as it     Holding the projector  push the elevator buttons to loose the elevator feet        Position the front side of the projector to the desired height   Release the elevator buttons in order to lock the elevator feet     After making sure that the elevator feet are locked  put the projector down    gently     ao hy  gt     If necessary  the elevator feet can be manually twisted to make more precise    adjustments  Hold the projector when twisting the feet        To loose an elevator foot  push the  elevator button on the same side as it                 ACAUTION    Do not handle the elevator buttons without holding the  projector  since the projector may drop down     gt  Do not tilt the projector other than elevating its front within 14 degrees using  the adjuster feet  A tilt of the projector exceeding the restriction could cause  malfunction or shortening the lifetime of consumables  or the projector itself     Displaying the picture  1 Activate your signal source  Turn the signal QNM     source on  and make it send the signal to e    Go  the projector  e
75.  the header to the checksum   Connection ID     Random value from 0 to 255  This value is attached    86    to the reply data     7 4 Command Control via the Network  Continued     Reply Data format    The connection ID  the data is same as the connection ID data on the sending  data format  is attached to the RS 232C commands reply data       ACK reply      Connection  ID          1 byte         NAK reply      Connection  ID    1 byte                  Error reply            Reply Error code a ee  0x1C 2 bytes 1 byte        lt Data reply gt                                Reply Data Connection   0x1D 2 bytes 1 byte   lt Projector busy reply gt    Reply Status code m   Ox1F 2 bytes 1 byte         Authentication error reply             Connection        Authentication  Error code                   1 byte    87    7 4 Command Control via the Network  Continued     Automatic Connection Break    The TCP connection will be automatically disconnected after there is no  communication for 30 seconds after being established     Authentication    The projector does not accept commands without authentication success   when authentication is enabled  The projector uses a challenge response type  authentication with an MD5  Message Digest 5  algorithm    When the projector is using a LAN  a random 8 bytes will be returned if  authentication is enabled  Bind this received 8 bytes and the Authentication  Password and digest this data with the MD5 algorithm and add this in front of the  comman
76.  the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading a battery     Keep a battery away from children and pets      Do not recharge  short circuit  solder or disassemble a battery      Do not place a battery in a fire or water  Keep batteries in a dark  cool and dry place      f you observe battery leakage  wipe out the leakage and then replace a battery   If the leakage adheres to your body or clothes  rinse well with water immediately     Obey the local laws on disposing the battery     About the remote control signal    The remote control works with the projector s remote  sensor  This projector has a remote sensor on the front   The sensor senses the signal within the following range  when the sensor is active   60 degrees  30 degrees to the left and right of the sensor   within 3 meters about        NOTE   The remote control signal reflected in the screen or the like may be available   If it is difficult to send the signal to the sensor directly  attempt to make the signal reflect     The remote control uses infrared light to send signals to the projector  Class 1  LED   so be sure to use the remote control in an area free from obstacles that  could block the remote control s signal to the projector       The remote control may not work correctly if strong light  such as direct sun  light  or light from an extremely close range  such as from an inverter fluorescent  lamp  shines on the remote sensor of the projector  Adjust the position of  projector avoiding 
77.  the projector returns the error code   In such a case  check the sending code and the setting status of the projector    4  Data reply   1Dh   xxxxh  When the projector receives the GET command correctly  the projector returns  the responce code and 2 bytes of data     NOTE   For connecting the projector to your devices  please read the  manual for each devices  and connect them correctly with suitable cables     Operation cannot be guaranteed when the projector receives an undefined  command or data     Provide an interval of at least 40ms between the response code and any other  code       The projector outputs test data when the power supply is switched ON  and  when the lamp is lit  Ignore this data      Commands are not accepted during warm up       When the data length is greater than indicated by the data length code  the  projector ignore the excess data code  Conversely when the data length is  shorter than indicated by the data length code  the projector returns the error  code to the computer        10    COEM  CONA MELLO NONON    When the projector connects network  the projector can be controlled with RS   232C commands from the computer with web browser     For details of RS 232C commands  refer to RS 232C Communication   Network  command table    117      Connection  1 Turn off the projector and the computer   2 Connect the projector s LAN port and the computer s LAN port with a LAN    cable  Use the cable that fulfills the specification shown in figure  Use C
78.  the registration failed  the following message is displayed    A capturing error has occurred  Please try again      This function cannot be selected when the ON is selected to the  MyScreen Lock item  46      This function cannot be selected when the ON is selected to the  MyScreen PASSWORD item in SECURITY menu    68      This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN  USB TYPE A   USB TYPE B or HDMI port            continued on next page     45    Description          MyScreen Lock    Using the A V buttons turns on off the MyScreen lock function   ON  amp  OFF    When the ON is selected  the item MyScreen is locked  Use this  function for protecting the current MyScreen     This function cannot be selected when the ON is selected to the  MyScreen PASSWORD item in SECURITY menu  LL168    Using the A    buttons turns on off the message function   ON  amp  OFF  When the ON is selected  the following message function works    AUTO IN PROGRESS  while automatically adjusting   NO INPUT IS DETECTED    SYNC IS OUT OF RANGE    INVALID SCAN FREQ     Searching      while searching for the input   Detecting      while an input signal is detected   AUTO ECO MODE  while starting up with AUTO ECO MODE  The indication of the input signal displayed by changing  The indication of the aspect ratio displayed by changing  The indication of the PICTURE MODE displayed by changing  The indication of the ACTIVE IRIS displayed by changing  The indication of the MY MEMORY displayed by chang
79.  to an existing network  consult a network  administrator before setting server addresses        3 4 Port Settings       Displays and configures communication port settings     Item Description    Network Control Port1   Port 23   Port open Click the  Enable  check box to use port 23     Click the  Enable  check box when authentication is required  for this port           Configures command control port 1  Port 23            Authentication       Network Control Port2   Port 9715     Port open Click the  Enable  check box to use port 9715     Click the  Enable  check box when authentication is required  for this port     Configures command control port 2  Port 9715            Authentication          PJLink     Port   Port 4352     Port open Click the  Enable  check box to use port 4352     Click the  Enable  check box when authentication is required  for this port     Configures the PJLink     port  Port 4352            Authentication       My Image Port   Port 9716     Port open Click the  Enable  check box to use port 9716     Click the  Enable  check box when authentication is required  for this port     Configures the My Image Port  Port 9716            Authentication          Messenger Port   Port 9719     Port open Click the  Enable  check box to use port 9719     Click the  Enable  check box when authentication is required  for this port     Configures the Messenger Port  Port 97 19            Authentication             50    3 4 Port Settings  Continued     Item    Des
80.  to the following figure        Weight  mass     approx  3 5kg       Computer input port   COMPUTER IN1 D sub 15 pin mini x1   COMPUTER IN2 D sub 15 pin mini x1  HDMI input port   HDMI connector x1   Computer output port   MONITOR OUT  Video input port    Audio input output port  AUDIO IN1  AUDIO IN2  AUDIO IN3  R  L   AUDIO OUT  R  L   Others  USB TYPEA  USB TYPE B  CONTROL D sub 9 pin x1  RJ45 x1  Stereo mini x1       Optional parts       Lamp  DT01021   Filter set  MU06481   Mounting accessary  HAS 3010  Bracket for ceiling mount   HAS 204L  Fixing adaptor for low ceilings   HAS 304H  Fixing adaptor for high ceilings    Laser remote control  RC R008   Soft case  CA3010      For more information  please consult your dealer        99    Specifications  continued                                  s  RGBBBEBBRORRRRRNRR   Lom      w     unit  mm     End User License Agreement for the Projector Software      Software in the projector consists of the plural number of independent software  modules and there exist our copyright or and third party copyrights for each of    such software modules     Be sure to read  End User license Agreement for the Projector Software  which  is separated document   in the CD        100    Projector    CP X2011N CP X2511N  ICP X3011N CP X4011N    User s Manual  detailed   Network Guide          Thank you for purchasing this product   This manual is intended to explain only the network function  For proper use of this  product  please refer to this ma
81.  want to connect the selected projector     The message is appeared when the wireless  adapter you selected is already used for  another network connection        Aro you sure you want to connect the selected projector       To connect  click the  Yes   Proceed to item  1 8 Confirming the connection to your  destination     2130       Not to connect  click the  No  then the cej w   LiveViewer  main menu is displayed even  though the network is not established   Click 55 on the main menu to go back  to item 1 5 Selecting the network  connection method     114     20    1 5 Selecting the network connection method  continued      3  Configuring manually    After entering the Passcode    117   you are required to enter the network  configuration manually if you use a Subnet mask other than Class A  B or C     15   If you use the wired LAN  go to    22      Wireless LAN  The projector is required to be connected to an access point by a LAN cable        1  The setting on the access point   1  Enter the following information   SSID   WirelessAccessPoint  example   Encryption  WEP64bit  example   Encryption key  2              example           2  The setting on the projector   3 RO UH a AN  Enter the following information  UU T AR pu uu  Subnet mask  4  255 255 255 128   example     3  Click the  Connect      4  The wireless connection will be established   Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination     130      1 Contact the network administrator to find out 
82.  will appear as shown on the right  Select eee the language  xe OR Kem  what you like to use in the list  and click the  OK   pude          Engish            NOTE   If the Choose Setup Language dialog doesn t appear  proceed as follows    1  Click on the  Start  button on the toolbar and select the  Run     2  Enter E  software setup exe and then press the  OK      If your CD ROM drive is not drive E on your computer  you will need to  replace E with the correct drive letter assigned to your CD ROM drive        If the software has been already installed  Uninstallation will be done  Click  the  Cancel  button  then uninstallation will be canceled  If you uninstalled the  Software by miss operation  please re install the software from first procedure     5  After a moment  the Welcome dialog will appear  as shown on the right  Press the  Next         1 2 Installing the  LiveViewer   continued     6  The License Agreement dialog appears  If  you accept it  select    I accept the terms of the  license agreement  and press the  Next     7  The Choose Destination Location dialog  appears  Press the  Next      accept the nma c e icono agreement  O l donat accepi the tema o he ceros agreement    NOTE   The C  Program Files Projector  Tools LiveViewer folder will be created and     Ce fone    core    the program will be installed into that folder  If  you wish to install to a different folder  click the   Browse  and select another folder     Seh vli rita etes tomar Id  To mil to us 
83. 0   76 74   01 00   12 22 07 00   Get BE EF   03   06 00   75 76   02 00   12 22 00 00   AUTO BE EF   03   06 00   A2 70   01 00   11 22 0A 00   NTSC BE EF   03   06 00   C2 74   01 00   11 22 04 00   PAL BE EF   03   06 00   52 75   01 00   11 22 05 00   C VIDEO Set SECAM BE EF   03   06 00   52 70   01 00   11 22 09 00   FORMAT NTSC4 43 BE EF   03   06 00   62 77   01 00   11 22 02 00   M PAL BE EF   03   06 00   C2 71   01 00   11 22 08 00   N PAL BE EF   03   06 00   32 74   01 00   11 22 07 00   Get BE EF   03   06 00   31 76   02 00   11 22 00 00     continued on next page     21       Names    Operation Type    Header    Command Data                                                                                                                                                                                  CRC Action Type Type  AUTO BEEF   03   0600 BA77   0100 1322 00 00  Set VIDEO BEEF   03   0600 2A 76 01 00 13 22 01 00  BIDNIDEETSMIND COMPUTER BEEF   03   0600   DA76   0100 13 22 02 00  Get BEEF   03   0600 89 77 02 00 13 22 00 00  AUTO BEEF   03   0600   86D8   0100 22 20 00 00  Se NORMAL BEEF   03   0600 16D9   0100 22 20 01 00  HIIMPISSNISE ENHANCED BEEF   03   0600   E6 D9   0100 22 20 02 00  Get BEEF   03   0600   B5D8   0200 22 20 00 00  AUTO BE EF   03   06 00   CE D6   01 00   10 20 03 00  COMPUTER IN1 i SYNC ONG OFF   BE EF   03   06 00   5E D7   01 00   10 20 02 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   OD D6   02 00   10 20 00 00  AUTO BE EF   03   06 00   32D7   01
84. 00   03 22 00 00   Decrement BE EF   03   06 00   FE 72   05 00   03 22 00 00   TINT Reset Execute BE EF   03   06 00   7C D1   06 00   OB 70 00 00   Get BE EF   03   06 00   F1 72   02 00   01 22 00 00   SHARPNESS Increment BE EF   03   06 00   97 72   04 00   01 22 00 00   Decrement BE EF   03   06 00   46 73   05 00   01 22 00 00   SHARPNESS Execute BE EF   03   06 00   C4 DO   06 00   09 70 00 00  Reset   ACTIVE IRIS OFF BE EF   03   06 00   OB 22   01 00   04 33 00 00   Set THEATER BE EF   03   06 00   CB 2F   01 00   04 33 10 00   PRESENTATION   BE EF   03   06 00   5B 2E   01 00   04 33 11 00   Get BE EF   03   06 00   38 22   02 00   04 33 00 00   NOTE  ACTIVE IRIS is available only for CP X2511N  CP X3011N  and CP X4011N    1 BE EF   03   06 00   OE D7   01 00 14 20 00 00   MY MEMORY Set 2 BE EF   03   06 00   9E D6   01 00 14 20 01 00   Load 3 BE EF   03   06 00   6E D6   01 00 14 20 02 00   4 BE EF   03   06 00   FE D7   01 00 14 20 03 00   1 BE EF   03   06 00   F2 D6   01 00 15 20 00 00   MY MEMORY Set 2 BE EF   03   06 00   62 D7   01 00 15 20 01 00   Save 3 BE EF   03   06 00   92 D7   01 00 15 20 02 00   4 BE EF   03   06 00   02 D6   01 00 15 20 03 00   4 3 BE EF   03   06 00   9E DO   01 00   08 20 00 00   16 9 BE EF   03   06 00   OE D1   01 00   08 20 01 00   ASPECT Set 14 9 BE EF   03   06 00   CE D6   01 00   08 20 09 00   16 10 BE EF   03   06 00   3E D6   01 00   08 20 OA 00   NORMAL BE EF   03   06 00   5E DD   01 00   08 20 10 00   Get BE EF   03   0
85. 03   0600   7AC4   0100 33 20 20 00  Get BEEF   03   0600   89DD   0200 33 20 00 00  AUDIO IN1 BE EF   03   06 00   A2 DC   01 00   35 20 01 00  AUDIO Sat AUDIO IN2 BE EF   03   06 00   52 DC   01 00   35 20 02 00  SOURCE   AUDIO IN3 BE EF   03   06 00   C2 DD   01 00   35 20 03 00  COMPONENT OFF BE EF   03   06 00   32 DD   01 00   35 20 00 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   01 DD   02 00   35 20 00 00  AUDIO IN1 BE EF   03   06 00   D6 DD   01 00   32 20 01 00  AUDIO Sat AUDIO IN2 BE EF   03   06 00   26 DD   01 00   32 20 02 00  SOURCE   AUDIO IN3 BE EF   03   06 00   Be DC   01 00   32 20 03 00  S VIDEO OFF BE EF   03   06 00   46 DC   01 00   32 20 00 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   75 DC   02 00   32 20 00 00  AUDIO IN1 BE EF   03   06 00   92 DD   01 00   31 20 01 00  AUDIO T    AUDIO IN2 BE EF   03   06 00   62 DD   01 00   31 20 02 00  SOURCE   AUDIO IN3 BE EF   03   06 00   F2 DC   01 00   31 20 03 00  VIDEO OFF BE EF   03   06 00   02 DC   01 00   31 20 00 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   31 DC   02 00   31 20 00 00  AUDIO IN1 BE EF   03   06 00   7A DF   01 00   3F 20 01 00  AUDIO Set AUDIO IN2 BE EF   03   06 00   8A DF   01 00   3F 20 02 00  SOURCE AUDIO IN3 BE EF   03   06 00   1A DE   01 00   3F 20 03 00  STANDBY OFF BE EF   03   06 00   EA DE   01 00   3F 20 00 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   D9 DE   02 00   3F 20 00 00  Set 1 BEEF   03   0600   AEC6   0100 40 20 01 00  HDMI AUDIO 2 BEEF   03   0600   5EC6   0100 40 20 02 00  Get BEEF   03   0600   ODC7   0200 40 20 00 00  S
86. 050  1200    Co  Co  O       OO  0  w  Ajj   WW    CO  Co  A ee ee ee mE              99     46           75Hz    1       60Hz    60HZ     SXGA   60Hz   UXGA  60Hz           Connection to the ponts                                                  use 7  ITYPEA  DCSV 0 5A                                                                                                            COMPUTER IN1   BCOMPUTER IN2   CMONITOR OUT  D sub 15pin mini shrink jack     Computer signal       Video signal  RGB separate  Analog  0 7Vp p  750 terminated  positive       H V  sync  signal  TTL level  positive negative     Composite sync  signal  TTL level      Component video signal      Video signal    Y  Analog  1 040 1Vp p with composite sync  75Q terminated   Cb Pb  Analog  0 7 0 1Vp p  750 terminated   Cr Pr  Analog  0 740 1Vp p 75Q terminated  System  480i 60  480p 60  576i 50  720p 50 60  1080i 50 60                                     Pin Signal Pin Signal  10  Ground  4   No connection  i       SDA  DDC data    No connection    B        No connection   13  H  sync   Composite sync    No connection   8  GroundBlue  Ground Cb Pb__  45     SCL  DDC clock    No connection    8        No connection                                                                                                                          Oo  IN   la e  6 o                                                                   COMPONENT QO    Cb Pb  F Cr Pr  RCA jack x3  e System  480i 60  480p 60  576i 50  720p 50 60  1
87. 080i 50 60  1080p 50 60    Signal          Component video Y  1 0 0 1Vp p with composite sync  75O terminator  Component video Cb Pb  0 7 0 1Vp p  750 terminator  Component video Cr Pr  0 7 0 1Vp p  75Q terminator     GS VIDEO qc    Mini DIN 4pin jack Q  5      System  NTSC  PAL  SECAM  PAL M  PAL N  NTSC4 43  PAL 60Hz   i Signal    Color signal 0 286Vp p  NTSC  burst   75Q terminator  Color signal 0 300Vp p  PAL SECAM  burst  75Q terminator                Brightness signal  1 0Vp p  75Q terminator    Ground          Ground     VIDEO   RCA jack     System  NTSC  PAL  SECAM  PAL M  PAL N  NTSC4 43  PAL 60Hz   e 1 040 1Vp p  750 terminator                                                                                                                                                           DHDMI LR ML 12 AO ser I A    Type  Digital audio video connector     P     zu  e Audio signal   Linear PCM  Sampling rate  32 44 1 48 kHz  Po ES                   Signal                T M D S  Data2   8  T M D S  Data0 Shield  2 MBS Dae Sag     3  EMBS DoD            15  504                    3  T M D S Data2    f0 TM DS Clck         17  DDC CEC Ground 1      6  TMD S Daat      d13   CEC      3                      AUDIO IN1   AUDIO IN2  93 5 stereo mini jack  e 200 mVrms 47kQ terminator    AUDIO IN3  DR  ML  RCA jack x2    200 mVrms 47kO terminator    AUDIO OUT  NR   OL  RCA jack x2    200 mVrms 1kQ output impedance                                                                          
88. 1 00   16 20 00 00   AUTO SEARCH ON BE EF   03   06 00   26 D7   01 00   16 20 01 00   Get BE EF   03   06 00   85 D6   02 00   16 20 00 00   AUTO Set OFF BE EF   03   06 00   EAD1   01 00   OF 20 00 00   KEYSTONE ON BE EF   03   06 00   7A DO   01 00   OF 20 01 00   Get BE EF   03   06 00   D9 D1   02 00   OF 20 00 00   OFF BE EF   03   06 00   3B 89   01 00   20 31 00 00   BORER ON Set ON BE EF   03   06 00   AB 88   01 00   20 31 01 00   Get BE EF   03   06 00   08 89   02 00   20 31 00 00   Get BE EF   03   06 00   08 86   02 00   10 31 00 00   PE Increment BE EF   03   06 00   6E 86   04 00   10 31 00 00   Decrement BE EF   03   06 00   BF 87   05 00   10 31 00 00   Set MOUSE BEEF   03   0600 FF 23 01 00 50 26 00 00   USB TYPE B USB DISPLAY BEEF   03   0600 6F 22 01 00 50 26 01 00   Get BEEF   03   0600   CC23   0200 50 26 00 00   LAMP TIME Get BE EF   03   06 00   C2 FF   02 00   90 10 00 00   LAMP TIME Execute BE EF   03   06 00   58 DC   06 00   30 70 00 00  Reset   FILTER TIME Get BE EF   03   06 00   C2 FO   0200   AO 10 00 00   mn Execute BE EF   03   06 00   98 C6   06 00   40 70 00 00                    continued on next page     27       Names    Operation Type    Header    Command Data                                                                                                                                                                         CRC Action Type Type  COMPUTER IN1   BE EF   03   06 00   3A 33   01 00   00 36 00 00  COMPUTER IN2   BE EF   03
89. 2  About Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment   4 Replacing the lamp                            13  Contents of package                            4 Cleaning and replacing the air filter    15  Preparations                    ssssssssssssss 5 Replacing the internal clock battery    16  Loading batteries into the remote control           5 Using the CD manual                         17  Arrangement             ssssssssseeeee 6 Specifications                       ssssssss 18   Connecting with your devices               7 Troubleshooting    Warranty and after service             19    First of all  Entries and graphical symbols explanation    The following entries and graphical symbols are used for the manuals and the  product as follows  for safety purpose  Please know their meanings beforehand   and heed them     AWARNING This entry warns of a risk of serious personal injury or even death   ACAUTION This entry warns of a risk of personal injury or physical damage   NOTICE This entry notices of fear of causing trouble     Important safety instruction    The followings are important instructions for safely using the product  Be sure to  follow them always when handling the product  The manufacturer assumes no  responsibility for any damage caused by mishandling that is beyond normal usage  defined in these manuals of this projector     AWARNING    Never use the product in or after an abnormality  ex  giving   off smoke  smelling strange  took a liquid or an object inside  
90. 2  Connect the projector s CONTROL port and the device s RS 232C port with  an RS 232C cable  for RS 232C communication     NOTE   Before connecting the devices  read the manuals for the devices to  ensure the connection   For RS 232C connection  check the specifications of each port and use    the suitable cable   EDI  Connection to the ports  in the User s Manual      Operating Guide  Technical         74    6 2 Communication setup    To configure the setup of the communication using NETWORK BRIDGE for  the projector  use items in the COMMUNICATION menu  Open the menu of  the projector and select the OPTION   SERVICE   COMMUNICATION menu    OPTION menu     SERVICE   COMMUNICATION in the User s Manual      Operating Guide     1  Using the COMMUNICATION TYPE menu  select the NETWORK BRIDGE  for the CONTROL port    2  Using the SERIAL SETTINGS menu  select the proper baud rate and parity  for the CONTROL port  according to the specification of the RS 232C port of  the connected device     Item Condition  BAUD RATE   4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps    PARITY NONE ODD EVEN          Data length 8 bit  fixed   Start bit 1 bit  fixed   Stop bit 1 bit  fixed     3  Using the TRANSMISSION METHOD menu  set up the proper method for the  CONTROL port according to your use           NOTE     The OFF is selected for the COMMUNICATION TYPE as the default  setting      Using the COMMUNICATION menu  set up the communication  Remember  that an unsuitable setup could cause malfunction of com
91. 6 00   68 D2   06 00   04 70 00 00   d r Execute BE EF   03   06 00   91 DO   06 00   OA 20 00 00   OFF BE EF   03   06 00   4A 72   0100   07 22 00 00   Set TV BE EF   03   06 00   DA 73   01 00   07 22 01 00   PROGRESSIVE FILM BE EF   03   06 00   2A 73   01 00   07 22 02 00   Get BE EF   03   06 00   79 72   02 00   07 22 00 00   LOW BE EF   03   06 00   26 72   01 00   06 22 01 00   Set MID BE EF   03   06 00   D6 72   01 00   06 22 02 00   VIDEO NR HIGH BE EF   03   06 00   46 73   01 00   06 22 03 00   Get BE EF   03   06 00   85 73   02 00   06 22 00 00   AUTO BE EF   03   06 00   OE 72   01 00   04 22 00 00   RGB BE EF   03   06 00   9E 73   01 00   04 22 01 00   Set SMPTE240 BE EF   03   06 00   6E 73   01 00   04 22 02 00   COLOR SPACE REC709 BE EF   03   06 00   FE 72   01 00   04 22 03 00   REC601 BE EF   03   06 00   CE 70   01 00   04 22 04 00   Get BE EF   03   06 00   3D 72   02 00   04 22 00 00   COMPONENT BE EF   03   06 00   4A D7   01 00   17 20 00 00   COMPONENT Se SCART RGB BE EF   03   06 00   DA D6   01 00   17 20 01 00   Get BE EF   03   06 00   79 D7   02 00   17 20 00 00   AUTO BE EF   03   06 00   E6 70   01 00   12 22 0A 00   NTSC BE EF   03   06 00   86 74   01 00   12 22 04 00   PAL BE EF   03   06 00   16 75   01 00   12 22 05 00   S VIDEO Set SECAM BE EF   03   06 00   16 70   01 00   12 22 09 00   FORMAT NTSC4 43 BE EF   03   06 00   26 77   01 00   12 22 02 00   M PAL BE EF   03   06 00   86 71   01 00   12 22 08 00   N PAL BE EF   03   06 0
92. 6 00   AD DO   02 00   08 20 00 00   Get BE EF   03   06 00   91 70   02 00   09 22 00 00   OVER SCAN Increment BE EF   03   06 00   F7 70   04 00   09 22 00 00   Decrement BE EF   03   06 00   26 71 05 00   09 22 00 00   OVER SCAN Execute BE EF   03   06 00   EC D9   06 00   27 70 00 00  Reset   Get BE EF   03   06 00   OD 83   02 00   00 21 00 00   V POSITION Increment BE EF   03   06 00   6B 83   04 00   00 21 00 00   Decrement BE EF   03   06 00   BA 82   05 00   00 21 00 00   V ulia Execute BE EF   03   06 00   EO D2   06 00   02 70 00 00              continued on next page     20       Names    Operation Type    Header    Command Data                                                                                                                                                                   CRC Action Type Type   Get BE EF   03   06 00   F1 82   02 00   01 21 00 00   H POSITION Increment BE EF   03   06 00   97 82   04 00   01 21 00 00   Decrement BE EF   03   06 00   46 83   05 00   01 21 00 00   HT OSITRON Execute BE EF   03   06 00   1C D3   06 00   03 70 00 00  Reset   Get BE EF   03   06 00   49 83   02 00   03 21 00 00   H PHASE Increment BE EF   03   06 00   2F 83   04 00   03 21 00 00   Decrement BE EF   03   06 00   FE82   05 00   03 21 00 00   Get BE EF   03   06 00   B5 82   0200   02 21 00 00   H SIZE Increment BE EF   03   06 00   D382   04 00   02 21 00 00   Decrement BE EF   03   06 00   02 83   05 00   02 21 00 00   H SIZE Reset Execute BE EF   03   0
93. 9ABC  The Passcode is given on the projector when the LAN port is selected as input  source     NOTE     The Passcode system does not work under the condition below  If  such is the case  establish the connection manually   1  Subnet mask is not Class A or B or C     The Passcode system accepts Class A  B and C only   Class A  255 0 0 0   ClassB  255 255 0 0   Class C  255 255 255 0        There are two methods to get the Passcode from the projector    Method 1    1  Turn on the projector  and make sure that the projector image is on screen   2  Press the COMPUTER button on the remote control or INPUT button on the  projector to select the LAN as input port   If there is no signal on the LAN port  you can find the Passcode on screen     15    1 5 Selecting the network connection method  continued     Method 2   1  Turn on the projector  and make sure that the projector image is on screen    2  Press the MENU button on the remote control or the A     lt   gt  buttons on  the projector to show the menu on screen    3  Use the A Y cursor buttons to select the Go to Advanced Menu     and use  the  gt  cursor button to enter the item    4  Use the A V cursor buttons to select the NETWORK  and use the    cursor  button to enter the item    5  Use the A Y cursor buttons to select the INFORMATION  and use the       cursor button to display the INFORMATION   6  The Passcode appears in the INFORMATION window     NOTE   Take the method 2 when you project your computer image by the   Liv
94. A port      Image files stored in the root directory of the USB memory device will be  displayed for the scheduled Slideshow    e Please refer to    Troubleshooting    in the User s Manual     Operating  Guide in case scheduled functions events are not executed appropriately as  you ve set        57    3 8 Date Time Settings       Displays and configures the date and time settings     Description          Current Date Configures the current date in year month day format   Current Time Configures the current time in hour minute second format     Click the  ON  check box to enable daylight savings time and  set the following items     Start Configures the date and time daylight savings time begins   Month Configures the month daylight savings time begins  1 12      Configures the week of the month daylight savings time  begins  First  2  3  4  Last      Configures the day of the week daylight savings time begins   Sun  Mon  Tue  Wed  Thu  Fri  Sat      hour Configures the hour daylight savings time begins  0   23    minute   Configures the minute daylight savings time begins  0   59    d Configures the date and time daylight savings time ends   Configures the month daylight savings time ends  1   12      Configures the week of the month daylight savings time ends   First  2  3  4  Last      Configures the day of the week daylight savings time ends   Sun  Mon  Tue  Wed  Thu  Fri  Sat      hour Configures the hour daylight savings time ends  0   23    minute   Configures the minu
95. AN  V POSITION  H POSITION   H PHASE  H size  AUTO ADJUST EXECUTE  INPUT menu                  PROGRESSIVE  VIDEO NR  COLOR SPACE   COMPONENT  VIDEO FORMAT  HDMI FORMAT   HDMI RANGE  COMPUTER IN   FRAME LOCK  RESOLUTION    2    EL  SETUP menu                 40  AUTO KEYSTONE  KEYSTONE  AUTO ECO MODE   Eco wobE  MIRROR  STANDBY MODE   MONITOR OUT  AUDIO menu                42  VOLUME  SPEAKER  AUDIO SOURCE   Hpm   AUDIO  Mic LEVEL  Mic VOLUME  SCREEN menu              44  LANGUAGE  MENU POSITION  BLANK   Start uP  MyScreen  MyScreen Lock   Messace  SOURCE NAME  TEMPLATE  C c   OPTION menu               50  AUTO SEARCH  AUTO KEYSTONE   DIRECT POWER ON  AUTO POWER OFF   USB TYPE B  LAMP TIME  FILTER TIME   My Button  My source  SERVICE  NETWORK menu             60  SETUP  PROJECTOR NAME  My IMAGE   AMX D D   PRESENTATION  INFORMATION   SERVICE  SECURITY menu             67    SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE    MyScreen PASSWORD  PIN LOCK    TRANSITION DETECTOR  My TEXT PASSWORD    My TEXT DISPLAY  Mv TEXT WRITING   Presentation tools   PC LESS Presentation  Thumbnail Mode  Full Screen Mode   Slideshow mode  Playlist    USB Display               82  Right Click menu  Floating menu   Options window   Maintenance                 85   Replacing the lamp              85   Cleaning and replacing the air filter     87   Replacing the internal clock battery     89   Other care                     90   Troubleshooting             91   Related messages               91   Regarding the indicator
96. AT 5  or greater LAN Cable when LAN ports are used      3 Turn the computer on  and after the computer has started up turn the    projector on     LAN cable  CAT 5 or greater                               TES  Id  k           11    Communicaion Port  The following two ports are assigned for the command control     TCP  23  TCP  9715    Configure the following items form a web browser when command control is used     Port Settings       Network Control  Port1  Port  23     Port open    Click the  Enable  check box to open  Network  Control Port1  Port  23   to use TCP  23   Default setting is  Enable         Authentication    Click the  Enable  check box for the   Authentication  setting when authentication  is required    Default setting is  Disable         Network Control  Port2  Port  9715        Port open    Click the  Enable  check box to open  Network  Control Port2  Port  9715   to use TCP   9715    Default setting is    Enable              Authentication       Click the  Enable  check box for the   Authentication  setting when authentication  is required    Default setting is    Enable           When the authentication setting is enabled  the following settings are required        Security Settings       Network Control    Authentication  Password          Re enter  Authentication  Password       Enter the desired authentication password   This setting will be the same for  Network  Control Port1  Port  23   and  Network  Control Port2  Port  9715      Default setting 
97. B hard disk and USB card reader type     NOTE   USB readers  adapters  that have more than one USB slot may not  work  if the adapter is acknowledged as multiple devices connected      USB hubs may not work       USB devices with security software may not work   e Be careful when inserting or removing a USB device   412  76         Supported format     FAT12  FAT16 and FAT32    NOTE     NTFS is not supported      Supported file format     JPEG   jpeg  jpg    Progressive is not supported       Bitmap   bmp    16bit mode and compressed bitmap is not supported     PNG   png    Interlace PNG is not supported     GIF   gif     NOTE   Files with a resolution greater than XGA are not supported     Files with a resolution smaller than 36x36 are not supported     Files with a resolution smaller than 100x100 may not be displayed       Some supported files may not be displayed     Only a frame appears when the content of image data cannot be displayed in  the Thumbnail mode        PC LESS Presentation  continued     Thumbnail mode    The Thumbnail mode displays the images stored in a USB storage device on the  Thumbnail screen  Maximum 20 images are displayed in a screen    If you wish  you can jump into the Full Screen mode or Slideshow mode  after you  select some images in the Thumbnail mode    The Thumbnail mode will be started as the primary function of the PC LESS  Presentation after selecting the USB TYPE A port as the input source       Thumbnail menu  Selected image       Thumb
98. BEEF   03   0600   OED2   0100   0020 03 00  COMPONENT   BE EF   03   06 00   AE D1   01 00   00 20 05 00  S Set S VIDEO BE EF   03   06 00   9E D3   01 00   00 20 02 00  nput Source VIDEO BE EF   03   06 00   6E D3   0100   0020   01 00  USB TYPEA BEEF   03   0600   5ED1   0100   0020 06 00  LAN BEEF   03   0600   CED5   0100   0020 OB 00  USB TYPE B BEEF   03   0600   FED7   0100 00 20 0C 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   CD D2  02 00   00 20 00 00  BE EF   03   06 00   D9 D8   02 00   20 60 00 00   Example return   00 00 01 00 02 00 03 00  Error Status tet  Normal   Cover error   Fan error   Lamp error   04 00 05 00 07 00 08 00   Temp error   Air flow error   Cold error   Filter error   Get BE EF   03   06 00   7C D2   02 00   07 30 00 00  MAGNIFY Increment BE EF   03   06 00   1A D2   04 00   07 30 00 00  Decrement BE EF   03   06 00   CB D3   05 00   07 30 00 00  Sat NORMAL BE EF   03   06 00   83 D2   01 00   02 30 00 00  FREEZE FREEZE BE EF   03   06 00   13 D3   01 00   02 30 01 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   BO D2   02 00   02 30 00 00  NORMAL BE EF   03   06 00   23 F6   01 00   BA 30 00 00  CINEMA BE EF   03   06 00   B3 F7   01 00   BA 30 01 00  DYNAMIC BE EF   03   06 00   E3 F4   01 00   BA 30 04 00  Set  BOARD BLACK    BE EF   03   06 00   E3 EF   01 00   BA 30 20 00  BOARD GREEN    BE EF   03   06 00   73 EE   01 00   BA 30 21 00  PICTURE WHITEBOARD   BE EF   03   06 00   83 EE   01 00   BA 30 22 00  MODE DAYTIME BE EF   03   06 00   E3 C7   01 00   BA 30 40 00  BE E
99. Consult to the network administrator  Log in the Windows under Administrator  authority  After that  please resume at item 1 3 2 Starting the  LiveViewer     E219     27    1 7 Configuring the network settings manually  continued     E  f you need to add a Network configuration on your computer to connect to the  projector        This dialog will be displayed when you    Do you want to apply suggested network settings as follows     need to add a Network configuration on Padites   192 168 1105  your computer to connect to the projector  Siretmak zmzmzmo hwo     Confirm with your network administrator if I Not delano corfemuton diog for aking Network soto    the Network configuration displayed on the  dialog is OK  and then click the  Yes      Click the  NO   then the  LiveViewer  main menu is displayed even though the  network is not established  Click        on the main menu and go back to item 1 5  Selecting the network connection method     114     If you put a check mark in the box  Not displaying confirmation dialog for adding  Network settings   the projector memorizes current configuration and this dialog  is not displayed again  To display this dialog again  click Option   icon in the   LiveViewer  main menu and remove the check mark in the box  Not displaying  confirmation dialog for adding Network settings      If you want to change the Network  configuration to add  click the  Change   A  dialog for changing the Network configuration  as shown to the right will be 
100. D asi NEAN RETNA 44    3  Web  Control Meet          Q 45  Sx Hore M CER 46  3 2 Network Information                  sssssseese eene eene 48  3 3 Network Settings                sssssssssseeeee eene enne eene nnns 49  3 4 Port Settings               ssssssssssssssseeeeeeeene eene nennen nnns 50  3 5 Mall SGUINGS    coperte ott rt m tuin c t D epe bbs 52  3 6 Alert Settings  ceo tedio rd ten t ED toni RE abate  53  3 7  Schedule Settings   honte O 55  3 8 Date Time Settings  io root erect e priis 58  3 9 Security  SENGS s  cpi e etit re Fais egere URS PER REX E ure EE neis 60  3 10  Projector Control   deiode t rcr hr e reds 61  3 11 Remote Control    a epit Ire ein Fen ride ra ERE ete  67  3 12  Projector Status aia don rera E REED nies 68  3 19  Network Restart    port tp RR RR ERE ED Rent 69   4  My Image Function              ccccccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 70   5  Messeger Function   uuueiueiuc eine cenar re rnern tinent nnnm niin nin eara 72   6  Network Bridge Function                              eeeeeeeeeneneeee 74  0 1 Connecting devices    ciae retire rns pon Eu pe ER E RED ERS 74  6 2 Communication setup                 ssssssssssssssssseeseeeneenen nemen 75  6 3 Communication DOLL tr re eine rhet ene seu pa REA EUR XNBR EE aa 75  6 4 Transmission method                    ssssssssssssssee eene 76   6 44 HALF DUPLEX sati tr etc ttr ptg tied tete a dna ge 76  6 4 2 FULL DUPLEX          ssssseseeeetete tette ttt ttt tette tette tette ttes 77   T
101. Displays thumbnail      These operations are not accessible while the projector OSD is displayed     The remote  control                NOTE   It is not possible to change the input port by using the INPUT button  when the Thumbnail screen  Slideshow  or Full Screen is displayed     When the Slideshow mode is set to ONE TIME  the last slide of the    presentation will be held on screen till the ENTER button on the remote control  or Web Remote Control  or INPUT button on the projector is pushed        79    PC LESS Presentation  continued     You can play the Slideshow at your desired configuration   Configure the Slideshow items in the Thumbnail        1  RETURN   Returns to the thumbnail mode    2  PLAY   Play the Slideshow    3  START   Set the beginning number of the  Slideshow    4  STOP   Set the end number of the Slideshow     5  INTERVAL   Set the interval time of the Slideshow   It is not recommend to set the interval  time very short something like several  seconds  because it may take more than  several seconds to read and display an  image file if it is stored in very deep layer  directory or if so many files are stored in  the same directory    6  PLAY MODE   Select the Slideshow mode   ONE TIME   Play the Slideshow one  time   ENDLESS   Play the Slideshow endless     NOTE   The settings of the Slideshow are saved to the    playlist txt    file   that is stored in the storage media  If the file is not existed  it is generated  automatically      The settings for 
102. ESET button on the  remote control while displaying an ce MY IMAGE T  image to display the MY IMAGE DELETE IMAGE 1  DELETE menu  a One     2  Press the  gt  button to perform to erase   To stop erasing  press the  lt  button     Use the A V buttons to turn the AMX Device Discovery on off     AMX D D  ON  gt  OPF     AMX Device   When ON is selected  the projector can be detected by controllers  Discovery  of AMX connected to the same network  For the details of AMX  Device Discovery  visit the AMX web site     URL  http   www amx com   as of Dec 2009         continued on next page     63    Description    Selecting this item displays the PRESENTATION menu   Use A Y buttons to select one of the following items  then press  gt   or ENTER button to use the function     If you set a computer to the Presenter mode while  its image is projected  the projector is occupied by  the computer and access from any other computer is  blocked   Use this function to quit the Presenter mode and  QUIT allow other computers to access the projector   PRESENTER   Select this item to display a dialog   MODE Press 9 button to choose OK in the dialog   The Presenter mode is cancelled and a message is  displayed indicating the result     To make Presenter mode setting  use  LiveViewer    For details  see the section Presenter mode in the  User s Manual   Network Guide              PRESENTATION    If you set one or more computers to the Multi PC  mode on  LiveViewer  and send their images to the  proj
103. Enter the following information that is set in  the projector   3  IP address   192 168 1 10  example   Subnet mask  255 255 255 0  example           4  Click the  Connect      5  The wireless connection will be established   Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination     1130      1 Contact the network administrator to find out the setting on the access point    2  f you use an encryption  you need to set it  Contact the network administrator  to check the encryption key that is set in the projector   The encryption key is always shown as  eee     3 To find the network setting on the projector  refer to the NOTE   122   26    1 7 Configuring the network settings manually  continued     Wired LAN    1  Enter the following information for the  projector   1  IP address   192 168 1 10  example   Subnet mask   255 255 255 0  example           2  Click the  Connect      3  The network connection will be established   Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination     130      1 To find the network setting on the projector  refer to the NOTE   122      Troubleshooting     W A network connection could not be established     Windows prevented network configuration  changes     You may log in the Windows under User  authority     Click the  OK   then the    LiveViewer    main  menu is displayed even though the network  is not established  Click   on the main  menu and go back to item 1 5 Selecting the  network connection method     14        
104. F   03   06 00   10 F6   02 00   BA 30 00 00   Example return   Get 00 00 01 00 04 00 10 00   Normal   Cinema   Dynamic   Custom   20 00 21 00 22 00 40 00   BOARD BLACK   BOARD GREEN   WHITEBOARD  DAY TIME   Get BE EF   03   06 00   89 D2   02 00   03 20 00 00  BRIGHTNESS Increment BE EF   03   06 00   EF D2   04 00   03 20 00 00  Decrement BE EF   03   06 00   3E D3   05 00   03 20 00 00  BRIGHINESS Execute BE EF   03   06 00   58 D3   06 00   00 70 00 00  Reset  Get BE EF   03   06 00   FD D3   02 00   04 20 00 00  CONTRAST Increment BE EF   03   06 00   9B D3   04 00   04 20 00 00  Decrement BE EF   03   06 00   4A D2   05 00   04 20 00 00        continued on next page     17          Names    Operation Type    Header    Command Data                                                                                                                               CRC Action Type Type   CONTRAST Execute BE EF   03   06 00   AA D2   06 oo   01 70   o0 00   1DEFAULT   BE EF   03   06 00   07 E9   0100   A130   20 00   1 CUSTOM BE EF  03   06 00   07 FD   01 00   A1 30   10 00   2DEFAULT   BE EF   03   06 00   97 EB   0100   A130   21 00   2 CUSTOM BE EF   03   06 00   97 FC   01 00   A1 30   11 00   3 DEFAULT   BE EF   03   06 00   67 EB   0100   A1 30   22 00   set S CUSTOM BE EF   03   06 00   67 FC   01 00   A1 30   12 00   GAMMA 4DEFAULT   BE EF   03   06 00   F7 E9   0100   A1 30   23 00   4 CUSTOM BE EF   03   06 00   F7 FD   01 00   A1 30   13 00   5DEFAULT   BE EF   03   06
105. GH BE EF   03   06 00   0B F5   0100   BO 30   03 00  1CUSTOM   BE EF   03   06 00   CB F8   01 00   BO 30   13 00  2 MID BE EF   03   06 00   9B F4   0100   BO 30   02 00  2CUSTOM  BEEF 03   06 00   5B F9   0100   Bo 30   12 00  3LOW BE EF   03   06 00   6B F4   0100   BO 30   01 00  set __2 custom   BE EF   03   06 o0   AB Fo   o1 00   Bo 30   11 00  COLOR TEMP 4Hi BRIGHT4   BE EF   03   06 00   3B F2   01 00   BO 30   08 00  4CUSTOM   BE EF   03   06 00   FB FF   0100   BO 30   18 00  5Hi BRIGHT 2   BE EF   03   06 00   AB F3   0100   BO 30   09 00  5CUSTOM   BE EF   03   06 00   6B FE   01 00   BO 30   19 00  6HiBRIGHT 3   BE EF   03   06 00   BB F3   01 00   BO 30   OA 00  6CUSTOM   BE EF   03   06 00   9B FE   0100   BO 30   1A 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   C8 F5   02 00   BO 30   00 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   34 F4   02 00   B1 30   00 00  EE Increment BE EF   03   06 00   52 F4   0400   B1 30   00 00  Decrement BE EF   03   06 00   88 F5   0500   B1 30   00 00  ANT oue Execute BE EF   03   06 00   10 ce   06 oo   46 70   00 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   70 F4   02 00   B2 30   00 00  i r uad Increment BE EF   03   06 00   16 F4   0400   B2 30   00 00  Decrement BE EF   03   06 00   C7 F5   0500   B230   00 00  CNN oiii Execute BE EF   03   06 00   EC c7   06 oo   47 70   00 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   8C F5   02 00   B3 30   00 00  PME Increment BE EF   03   06 00   EA F5  04 00   B3 30   00 00  Decrement BE EF   03   06 00   3B F4   0500   B3 30   00 00  NE Uu Execu
106. IC  LEVEL item of the AUDIO menu when you input line level audio signal to the  MIC port  The volume of the microphone and that of the sound from the projector  can be controlled separately except for the standby mode  However  if you mute  the sound from the projector  the sound from the microphone is also muted     Speakers  with an amplifier    P   Monitor                                             USB storage    device L    C    USB    E                                         mo COMPUTER  IN2                                                          B OUT    MIC AUDIO car CriPr    CONTROL  ChiPb     amp             Oo                            NOTE    If a loud feedback noise is produced from the speaker  move the  microphone away from the speaker       This projector doesn t support plug in power for the microphone         continued on next page     Connecting with your devices  continued     To use network functions of the projector  connect the LAN port with the  computer s LAN port  or with an access point that is connected to the computer  with wireless LAN  using a LAN cable  To use NETWORK BRIDGE function    also connect the CONTROL port and an RS 232C port of the external device to  communicate as a network terminal  See the User s Manual   Network Guide for  details of the network functions     Computer    Access point mu RS 232C                                                                rdi   o ENO coupes   a A f  HOMI USB aA COMPUTER IN1   DC OSA   TYPE B
107. IDGE   EQOPTION menu      SERVICE   COMMUNICATION in the User s Manual   Operating Guide                                   RS 232C    o EN s                                     cS  c  c                                  Communication settings    For communication setting  use the OPTION   SERVICE   COMMUNICATION  menu   OPTION menu   SERVICE   COMMUNICATION in the User s Manual    Operating Guide     Item Condition          BAUD RATE 4800bps   9600bps   19200bps   38400bps    NOTE   For connecting the projector to your devices  please read the  manual for each devices  and connect them correctly with suitable cables   e Turn off  the power of   both the projector and other devices and unplug    beore connecting them      For details of Transmission method  refer to 3 8 4 Transmission method   Network Guide        16    I8Sz2326 6omnmnunicatiomaNetwork  commarnabtable                                                                                                                                                                                 Command Data  Names Operation Type Header CRC   Action   Type Type  eat Turn off BE EF   03   06 00   2A D3   01 00   00 60 00 00  Turn on BE EF   03   06 00   BA D2   01 00   00 60 01 00  Power BE EF   03   06 00   19 D3   02 00   00 60 00 00  Get  Example return   00 00 01 00 02 00   Off   On   Cool down   COMPUTER IN1   BE EF   03   06 00   FE D2   01 00   00 20 00 00  COMPUTER IN2   BE EF   03   06 00   3E DO   01 00   00 20 04 00  HDMI 
108. MI audio device     Sound does not  come out           The lens cover is attached   Remove the lens cover        The signal cables are not correctly connected   Correctly connect the connection cables        The brightness is adjusted to an extremely low level   Adjust BRIGHTNESS to a higher level using the menu function     The computer cannot detect the projector as a plug and play monitor   Make sure that the computer can detect a plug and play  monitor using another plug and play monitor     The BLANK screen is displayed   No pictures are   Press BLANK button on the remote control    displayed    The USB TYPE B port is selected as the picture input  source even if MOUSE is selected for USB TYPE B   Select USB DISPLAY for USB TYPE B in OPTION menu to    project the picture input to the port  Otherwise select other  port for picture input                 The projector does not recognize the USB storage  device inserted into USB TYPE A port    Use the REMOVE USB function first  remove the USB  storage device  and then insert it into the port again    Before removing the USB storage device  be sure to use  the REMOVE USB function on the thumbnail screen  which  appears when the USB TYPE A port is selected as the input  Source               continued on next page     96    Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects  continued     Phenomenon    Cases not involving a machine defect    Reference  page          Video screen  display freezes     Colors have a  fa
109. NU POSITION    START UP    Using the A     lt  P buttons switches the OSD  On Screen  Display  language   ENGLISH       FRANCAIS  amp  DEUTSCH    ESPANOL   shown in the LANGUAGE dialog     Press the ENTER or INPUT button to save the language setting     Using the A     lt  P buttons adjusts the menu position   To quit the operation  press the MENU button on the remote control  or keep no operation for about 10 seconds     Using the A    buttons switches the mode for the blank screen   The blank screen is a screen for the temporarily blanking feature   E1125   It is displayed by pressing the BLANK button on the remote  control    MyScreen    amp  ORIGINAL    amp  BLUE  amp  WHITE    amp  BLACK   t St   MyScreen   Screen can be registered by the MyScreen item  145     ORIGINAL   Screen preset as the standard screen    BLUE  WHITE  BLACK   Plain screens in each color     To avoid remaining as an afterimage  the MyScreen or ORIGINAL  screen will change to the plain black screen after several minutes                 Using the A    buttons switches the mode for the start up screen   The start up screen is a screen displayed when no signal or an  unsuitable signal is detected     MyScreen      ORIGINAL    OFF  f    4j          MyScreen   Screen can be registered by the MyScreen item  145     ORIGINAL   Screen preset as the standard screen    OFF   Plain black screen     To avoid remaining as an afterimage  the MyScreen or ORIGINAL  screen will change to the BLANK screen  above  afte
110. ONE V Adjusts the vertical keystone distortion setting    AUTO ECO MODE Turns on off the automatic eco mode function    ECO MODE Selects the eco mode    MIRROR Selects the mirror status    STANDBY MODE Selects the standby mode    MONITOR OUT   Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the COMPUTER IN1 input  COMPUTER IN1 port is selected    MONITOR OUT   Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the COMPUTER IN2 input    COMPUTER IN2    port is selected        MONITOR OUT   LAN    Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the LAN input port is  selected        MONITOR OUT   USB  TYPEA    Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the USB TYPE A input  port is selected        MONITOR OUT   USB  TYPEB    Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the USB TYPE B input  port is selected                          MONITOR OUT   Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the HDMI input port is  HDMI selected    MONITOR OUT   Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the COMPONENT input  COMPONENT port is selected    MONITOR OUT   Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the S VIDEO input port is  S VIDEO selected    MONITOR OUT   Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the VIDEO input port is  VIDEO selected    eee S Assigns the MONITOR OUT in the standby mode        63    Item    3 10 Projector Control  Continued     Description          AUDIO       VOLUME    Adjusts the volume setting        SPEAKER    Turns the built in speaker on off        AUDIO SOURCE    COMPUTER IN1    Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE   COMPUTER IN1 input port        AUDIO SOURCE    COMPUTER IN2    Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE   COMPUTE
111. Port  Port  9716   Click the  Enable   check box for the  Authentication  setting  when authentication is required  otherwise  clear the check box   5  Click the  Apply  button to save the settings           When the authentication setting is enabled  the following settings are required     6  Click the  Security Settings  on the main menu   7  Select the  Network Control  and enter the desired authentication password   8  Click the  Apply  button to save the settings     NOTE     The Authentication Password will be the same for Network Control  Port1  Port  23   Network Control Port2  Port  9715   PJLink    Port  Port   4352   My Image Port  Port  9716  and Messenger Port  Port  9719        The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network  connection  When the configuration settings are changed  you must restart the  network connection  You can restart the network connection by clicking the   Network Restart  on the main menu        71    Oe MESSINE Une torn    The projector can display the text data transferred via the network on the screen   The text data can be displayed on the screen in two ways that displays the text  transferred from the computer on real time  and the other chooses and displays  the text data from the ones once stored in the projector        abcdefghijkImnopqrstuvwxyz   B ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUWXYZ  B 0123456789   B Today s Topics The chemical                             Today s Topics    The chemical class is    canceled Displa
112. Projector    CP X2011N CP X2511N  ICP X3011N CP X4011N    User s Manual  detailed   Operating Guide       Thank you for purchasing this projector         Al  outsthaisimamual    Various symbols are used in this manual  The meanings of these symbols are  described below     AWARNING This symbol indicates information that  if ignored  could possibly  result in personal injury or even death due to incorrect handling   ANCAUTION This symbol indicates information that  if ignored  could possibly  result in personal injury or physical damage due to incorrect  handling   NOTICE This entry notices of fear of causing trouble   LH  Please refer to the pages written following this symbol     NOTE     The information in this manual is subject to change without notice     The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in    this manual     The reproduction  transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not  permitted without express written consent        Trademark acknowledgment   e Mac  is a registered trademark of Apple Inc      Windows    is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U S  and or other  countries      VESA and DDC are trademarks of the Video Electronics Standard Association      HDMI  the HDMI logo  and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered  trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries      Trademark PJLink is a trademark applied for trademark rights    in Japan  t
113. R IN2 input port        AUDIO SOURCE    LAN    Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE   LAN input port        AUDIO SOURCE    USB TYPEA    Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE   USB TYPE A input port        AUDIO SOURCE    USB TYPE B    Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE   USB TYPE B input port        AUDIO SOURCE    HDMI    Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE   HDMI input port        AUDIO SOURCE    COMPONENT    Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE   COMPONENT input port        AUDIO SOURCE    S VIDEO    Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE   S VIDEO input port        AUDIO SOURCE    VIDEO    Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE   VIDEO input port        AUDIO SOURCE    STANDBY    Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE in the standby mode        HDMI AUDIO    Selects the HDMI audio setting        MIC LEVEL    Selects the microphone level        MIC VOLUME    Adjusts the microphone volume setting        SCREEN       LANGUAGE    Selects the language for the OSD        MENU POSITION V    Adjusts the vertical Menu position        MENU POSITION H    Adjusts the horizontal Menu position        BLANK    Selects the Blank mode        START UP    Selects the start up screen mode        MyScreen LOCK    Turns MyScreen lock function on off        MESSAGE    Turns the message function on off        TEMPLATE    Selects the template setting        C C    DISPLAY    Selects Closed Caption DISPLAY setting        C C    MODE    Selects Closed Caption MODE setting           C C    CHANNEL          Selects Closed Caption CHANNEL setting     3 10 Projector Control  Continued     Item    De
114. T button on the remote control  ASPECT button     Each time you press the button  the projector switches the  mode for aspect ratio in turn     O For a computer signal  NORMAL  gt  4 3  gt  16 9  gt  16 10  ee   lol d                O For an HDMI signal  NORMAL  gt  4 3  gt  16 9  gt  16 10  gt  14 9  eee    O For a video signal  s video signal or component video signal  4 3  gt  16 9  gt  14 9            O For an input signal from the LAN  USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B port  or  if there is no signal  4 3  fixed        e ASPECT button does not work when no proper signal is inputted   e NORMAL mode keeps the original aspect ratio setting     20    Adjusting the projector s elevator    When the place to put the projector is slightly uneven to the left or right  use the  elevator feet to place the projector horizontally    Using the feet can also tilt the projector in order to projectat      a suitable angle to the screen  elevating the front side of the 14     projector within 14 degrees           1 11 1  This projector has 2 elevator feet and 2 elevator buttons  An elevator foot is  adjustable while pushing the elevator button on the same side as it           y  T    1 Holding the projector  push the elevator buttons to loose the elevator feet   Position the front side of the projector to the desired height     Release the elevator buttons in order to lock the elevator feet   After making sure that the elevator feet are locked  put the projector down    gently     If necessary  th
115. T menu is set to AUTO  and the   projector recognizes that it receives video signals      When this adjustment is too large  certain degradation may appear  at the frame area of the picture  In such a case  please adjust small         continued on next page     33    Description          V POSITION    H POSITION       Using the  lt  P gt  buttons adjusts the vertical position    Down  amp  Up    Over adjusting the vertical position may cause noise to appear on  the screen  If this occurs  please reset the vertical position to the  default setting  Pressing the RESET button when the V POSITION  is selected will reset the V POSITION to the default setting     When this function is performed on a video signal or an s video  signal  the range of this adjustment depends on OVER SCAN    133   setting  It is not possible to adjust when OVER SCAN is set to 10     This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN  USB TYPE A   USB TYPE B or HDMI port     Using the  lt  P gt  buttons adjusts the horizontal position    Right    Left    Over adjusting the horizontal position may cause noise to appear on  the screen  If this occurs  please reset the horizontal position to the  default setting  Pressing the RESET button when the H POSITION is  selected will reset the H POSITION to the default setting     When this function is performed on a video signal or an s video  signal  the range of this adjustment depends on OVER SCAN    33   setting  It is not possible to adjust when OVER SCAN
116. T port  is working as a SCART RGB input port  Please refer to the  COMPONENT item in INPUT menu    36      This item can t be selected for no signal and sync out     When the MY TEXT DISPLAY is set to ON  the MY TEXT is  displayed together with the input information in the INPUT_  INFORMATION box    459    FACTORY RESET  Selecting OK using the    gt  button performs this function  By this  function  all the items in all of menus will collectively return to the  initial setting  Note that the items LAMP TIME  FILTER TIME   LANGUAGE  FILTER MESSAGE  NETWORK and SECURITY  settings are not reset    CANCEL  gt  OK    59    Nip STA MENU    Remember that incorrect network settings on this  projector may cause trouble on the network  Be sure   to consult with your network administrator before  connecting to an existing access point on your network   Select  NETWORK  from the main menu to access the  following functions    Select an item using the A V cursor buttons on the  projector or remote control  and press the    cursor button on the projector or  remote control  or ENTER button on the remote control to execute the item  Then  perform it according to the following table    See the User s Manual   Network Guide for details of NETWORK operation        NOTE   If you are not utilizing SNTP  LQDate Time Settings in the User s  Manual   Network Guide   then you must set the DATE AND TIME during the  initial installation      The network communication control is disabled while the proj
117. TER IN2  in step  2  and vice versa     If you have changed the setting of STANDBY  it applies only to  the current standby mode  NORMAL or SAVING  selected under  STANDBY MODE  without changing the setting of the other mode   The factory settings are as follows     COMPUTER IN1 for the NORMAL mode of STANDBY MODE    OFF for the SAVING mode of STANDBY MODE       41    AODOU    From the AUDIO menu  items shown in the table below  can be performed  Select an item using the A W cursor  buttons  and press the  gt  cursor button or the ENTER  button to execute the item  Then perform it according to  the following table        Item Description          Using the  lt  P gt  buttons adjusts the volume     VOLUME Low    High    Using the A    buttons turns on off the built in speaker   ON       OFF  When OFF is selected  the built in speaker does not work     While the image signal from the input port chosen in step  1  is  projected  the audio signal from the input port selected in step   2  is output to both the AUDIO OUT port and built in speaker of  this projector  However  the built in speaker does not work when  SPEAKER is set to OFF    1  Choose a picture input port using the   A Y buttons    Choose STANDBY to select the sound   output in the standby mode    2  Select one of the AUDIO IN ports using    lt  P gt  buttons    Select X to mute the sound from the   input port or in the standby mode chosen in the step  1      In the AUDIO SOURCE window     H    symbolizes the audio s
118. The images may not be displayed on screen  if the Start Stop buttons  are clicked repeatedly          The primary image is displayed in multi display environment     37    2 1 Using the  LiveViewer   continued     G Hold button  The image on screen is temporally frozen   The last image before the button is clicked is remained on screen   You can revise the image data on your computer without showing it on the  projector s screen      Display mode button    440   The button switches the Single PC mode and Multi PC mode      Connect button  The screen to select the connection mode is displayed   Go to item 1 5     14      Option button  The option screen is displayed      Web control button  Starts the Web browser on your computer and displays Web control screen  to control the projector and change various settings for the projector   L245   Information button  The version of the  LiveViewer  is displayed          Close button  The network is disconnected and the    LiveViewer    is closed      Minimize button  The main menu is closed  and the    LiveViewer    icon is displayed on the  task tray in your computer  The displayed icon changes as shown below  depending on the status of the    LiveViewer     If the icon is double clicked  the  last type of the main menu will be shown on screen     Connected Disconnected Not connected Hold    38    2 1 Using the  LiveViewer   continued     2 1 2 Displaying the status    1  Indicator  The indicator shows the following status     Indic
119. USB TYPE B port     HDMI  Selects input from HDMI port   e COMPUTER IN1  Selects the input from COMPUTER IN1 port     COMPUTER IN2  Selects the input from COMPUTER IN2 port     COMPONENT  Selects the input from component video  Y  Cb Pb  Cr Pr  ports     S VIDEO  Selects the input from S VIDEO port     VIDEO  Selects the input from VIDEO port     SLIDESHOW  Selects the input from USB TYPE A  and starts a Slideshow   e MY IMAGE  Displays the MY IMAGE menu    163    MY BUTTON   MESSENGER  Turns the messenger text displayed on the screen on off   Messenger Function in the User s Manual   Network Guide    When there is no transferred text data to display  the message   NO MESSENGER DATA  appears     INFORMATION  Displays SYSTEM INFORMATION   INPUT INFORMATION  259   NETWORK INFORMATION   L66  or nothing      AUTO KEYSTONE   Performs automatic keystone distortion  correction  8340     e MY MEMORY  Loads one of adjustment data stored    32    When more than one data are saved  the adjustment  changes every time the MY BUTTON is pressed   When no data is saved in memory  the  dialog  No saved data  appears  No waved data SEER  When the current adjustment is not  saved to memory  the dialog as shown in  the right appears   If you want to keep the current adjustment  please press  the  gt  button to exit  Otherwise loading a data will overwrite the  current adjusted condition         continued on next page     53    Description          MY BUTTON   Continued     MY SOURCE         ACTI
120. USB storage device  such as a USB memory  into the USB TYPE A  port and select the port as the input source  you can view images stored in the    device     You can connect a dynamic microphone to the MIC port with a 3 5 mm mini plug     In that case  the built in speaker outputs the sound from the microphone  even  while the sound from the projector is output      continued on next page     Connecting with your devices  continued     Speakers   with an amplifier     Monitor  RGB IN    irm            Microphone  system                                             USB storage    device  Pa                                                                                                            6 ES   ej elem emo gre  use 7t   ey id        COMPUTER INT   un    IDC5V 0 5A        veo  Gs      TN MONITOR OUT  ME o Cir S VIDEO   CONTROL  i                  AWARNING P Use only the appropriate accessories  Otherwise it could   cause a fire or damage to the device and the projector      Use only the accessories specified or recommended by the projector   s  manufacturer  Consult your dealer when the required accessory did not come  with the product or the accessory is damaged  It may be regulated under  some standard      For a cable with a core at only one end  connect the end with the core to the  projector  That may be required by EMI regulations      Neither disassemble nor modify the projector and the accessories      Do not use the damaged accessory  Be careful not to damage the
121. VANCED  MENU  select the ADVANCED MENU     2  Use the  lt   gt  cursor buttons to operate the item     In the ADVANCED MENU     1  Use the A    cursor buttons to select a menu   If you want to change it to the EASY MENU   select the EASY MENU    The items in the menu appear on the right side     2  Press the    cursor button or ENTER button to  move the cursor to the right side  Then use the  A Y cursor buttons to select an item to operate and press the    cursor  button or ENTER button to progress  The operation menu or dialog of the  selected item will appear     3  Use the buttons as instructed in the OSD to operate the item            continued on next page     26    Using the menu function  continued     3 To close the MENU  press the MENU button again or select EXIT and press    the  lt  cursor button or ENTER button  Even if you do not do anything  the  dialog will automatically disappear after about 30 seconds     e If you want to move the menu position  use the cursor buttons after pressing the  POSITION button    e Some functions cannot be performed when a certain input port is selected  or  when a certain input signal is displayed    e When you want to reset the operation  press RESET button on the remote  control during the operation  Note that some items  ex  LANGUAGE  VOLUME   cannot be reset    e In the ADVANCED MENU  when you want to return to the previous display   press the  lt  cursor button or ESC button on the remote control     Indication in OSD  On Scre
122. VD signals   16 235   ENHANCED sets the suitable mode for computer signals   0 255       If the contrast of the screen image is too strong or too weak  try  finding a more suitable mode                              continued on next page     37    Description          COMPUTER IN    FRAME LOCK    The computer input signal type for COMPUTER IN1 and IN2 ports  can be set      1  Use the A Y buttons to select the COMPUTER IN port to be set      2  Use the  lt   gt  buttons to select  the computer input signal type     AUTO    amp  SYNC ON G OFF      Selecting the AUTO mode allows   you to input a sync on G signal or component video signal from the  port  Please refer to  Technical  for the connection of component  video input to COMPUTER IN1 2 port      In the AUTO mode  the picture may be distorted with certain  input signals  In such a case  remove the signal connector so that  no signal is received and select the SYNC ON G OFF  and then  reconnect the signal     Set the frame lock function on off for each port    1  Use the A    buttons to select  the input ports      2  Use the  lt   gt  buttons to turn the  frame lock function on off      ON  amp  OFF      This item can be performed only on a signal with a vertical  frequency of 49 to 51Hz  59 to 61 Hz      When ON is selected  moving pictures are displayed more  smoothly      This function may cause a certain degradation of the picture  In  Such a case  please select OFF         continued on next page     38    Description
123. VE IRIS  Changes the active iris mode    This item is available only for CP X2511N  CP X3011N or CP   X4011N       PICTURE MODE  Changes the PICTURE MODE  28       FILTER RESET  Displays the filter time reset confirmation dialogue  R952       TEMPLATE  Makes the template pattern selected to the  TEMPLATE item    148  appear or disappear      AV MUTE  Turns the picture and audio on off    e RESOLUTION  Turns on off the RESOLUTION dialog  439      e MIC VOLUME  Turns on off the MIC VOLUME dialog    43    e ECO MODE  Turns on off the ECO MODE dialog    141      Using A F buttons selects the picture input port to be selected with  pressing the MY SOURCE DOC CAMERA button on the remote  control    You can use this function not only for document cameras but also  computers and other equipment     Hiit IN1  lt  COMPUTER IN2  amp  LAN  amp  USB TYPE A    VIDEO S VIDEO    amp  COMPONENT  amp  HDMI   USB TYPE B     continued on next page     54       Description    Selecting this item displays the SERVICE  menu    Select an item using the A V buttons   and press the  gt  button or the ENTER  button on the remote control to execute  the item     FAN SPEED   Using the A    buttons switches the rotation speed of the cooling  fans  The HIGH is the mode for use at highlands etc  Note that the  projector is noisier when the HIGH is selected     HIGH    NORMAL    AUTO ADJUST  Using the A V buttons to select one of the mode  When the  DISABLE is selected  the automatic adjustment feature is di
124. VOLUME   Get BE EF   03   06 00   CD CC   02 00   60 20 00 00  COMPUTER IN1 Incremen BE EF   03   06 00   AB CC   04 00   60 20 00 00  Decrement BE EF   03   06 00   7A CD   05 00   60 20 00 00   VOLUME   Get BE EF   03   06 00   FD CD  02 00   64 20 00 00  COMPUTER IN2 Incremen BE EF   03   06 00   9B CD   04 00   64 20 00 00  Decrement BE EF   03   06 00   4A CC   05 00   64 20 00 00   VOLUME   Get BE EF   03   06 00   01 CC   02 00   65 20 00 00  COMPONENT Incremen BE EF   03   06 00   67 CC   04 00   65 20 00 00  Decrement BE EF   03   06 00   B6 CD   05 00   65 20 00 00   VOLUME   Get BE EF   03   06 00   75 CD   02 00   62 20 00 00  S VIDEO Incremen BE EF   03   06 00   13 CD   04 00   62 20 00 00  Decrement BE EF   03   06 00   C2 CC   05 00   62 20 00 00   VOLUME   Get BE EF   03   06 00   31 CD   02 00   61 20 00 00  VIDEO Incremen BE EF   03   06 00   57 CD   04 00   61 20 00 00  Decrement BE EF   03   06 00   86 CC   05 00   61 20 00 00                                   continued on next page     23       Names    Operation Type    Header    Command Data                                                                                                                                              CRC Action Type Type   Get BEEF   03   0600   89CC   0200 63 20 00 00   VOLUME   HDMI Incremen BEEF   03   0600   EFCC   0400 63 20 00 00  Decrement BEEF   03   0600   3ECD   0500 63 20 00 00   Get BEEF   03   0600   ESCE   0200   6B20 00 00   VOLUME   LAN Incremen BEEF   03  
125. a  If you want to keep the current adjustment  please  save it before performing a LOAD function      There may be some noise and the screen may flicker for a  moment when loading data  This is not malfunction      You can perform the LOAD function using MY BUTTON  Please  see MY BUTTON item in OPTION menu  153               IM NGT  ManU    From the IMAGE menu  items shown in the table  below can be performed    Select an item using the A V cursor buttons  and  press the    cursor button or ENTER button to  execute the item  Then perform it according to the    following table        Description          ASPECT    OVER SCAN    Using the A    buttons switches the mode for aspect ratio   For a computer signal    NORMAL   4   4 3  amp  16 9    16 10  ft    1          For an HDMI signal  NORMAL    4 3       16 9   16 10    14 9  T fr    For a video signal  s video signal or component video signal  4 3       16 9 o 14 9  f          For an input signal from the LAN  USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B    port  or if there is no signal  4 3  fixed     The NORMAL mode keeps the original aspect ratio of the signal     Using the  lt  P gt  buttons adjusts the over scan ratio    Small  It magnifies picture     amp    Large  It reduces picture     This item can be selected only for a video  s video and component  video signal     For an HDMI signal  this item can also be selected if either  1  or  2   applies    1  HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to VIDEO    2  HDMI FORMAT item in the INPU
126. a battery  as a battery can cause  explosion  cracking or leakage  which could result in a fire  an injury  and  environment pollution      Use only the specified and perfect battery  Do not use a battery with damage   such as a scratch  a dent  rust or leakage      When replacing the battery  replace it with a new battery      When a battery leaked  wipe the leakage out well with a waste cloth  If the  leakage adhered to your body  immediately rinse it well with water  When a battery  leaked in the battery holder  replace the batteries after wiping the leakage out      Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading a battery     Do not work on a battery  for example recharging or soldering      Keep a battery in a dark  cool and dry place  Never expose a battery to a fire or water     Keep a battery away from children and pets  Be careful for them not to swallow  a battery  If swallowed consult a physician immediately for emergency treatment     Obey the local laws on disposing a battery     89    Other care    Inside of the projector    In order to ensure the safe use of your projector  please have it cleaned and  inspected by your dealer about once every year     Caring for the lens    If the lens is flawed  soiled or fogged  it could cause deterioration of display  quality  Please take care of the lens  being cautious of handling     1 Turn the projector off  and unplug the power cord  Allow the projector to cool    sufficiently     2 After maki
127. aler          If the lamp should break  it will make a loud bang when it does   unplug  the power cord from the outlet  and make sure to request a replacement  lamp from your local dealer  Note that shards of glass could damage the  projector s internals  or cause injury during handling  so please do not try to  clean the projector or replace the lamp yourself         If the lamp should break  it will make a loud bang when it does   ventilate  Disconnect the room well  and make sure not to breathe the gas that comes out of the  re ua projector vents  or get it in your eyes or mouth   outlet   Before replacing the lamp  make sure the power switch is off and the  power cable is not plugged in  then wait at least 45 minutes for the lamp to  cool sufficiently  Handling the lamp while hot can cause burns  as well as  damaging the lamp          Do not open the lamp cover while the projector is suspended from above   This is dangerous  since if the lamp s bulb has broken  the shards will  fall out when the cover is opened  In addition  working in high places is  Q dangerous  so ask your local dealer to have the lamp replaced even if the  bulb is not broken     Do not use the projector with the lamp cover removed  At the lamp  replacing  make sure that the screws are screwed in firmly  Loose screws  could result in damage or injury          Use the lamp of the specified type only       f the lamp breaks soon after the first time it is used  it is possible that   there are electrical 
128. and defect to hardware and    software of your computer as a result of the use of the CD ROM     All or Any part of the information in the CD ROM must not be copied   reproduced or republished without notice to our company        Specifications    Item Specification  Product name Liquid crystal projector    Liquid Crystal Panel 786 432 pixels  1024 horizontal x 768 vertical     t      CP X2011N   190 W UHP  p   CP X2511N  CP X3011N  CP X4011N gt  210 W UHP    16 W mono  8Wx 2  Power supply   CP X2011N   AC 100 120 V 3 2 A  AC 220 240 V 1 7A    Rated current   CP X2511N  CP X3011N  CP X4011N   AC 100 120 V 3 4 A  AC 220 240 V 1 8 A    CP X2011N   AC 100 120 V  310 W  AC 220 240 V 290 W    CP X2511N  CP X3011N  CP X4011N gt  AC 100 120 V  330 W  AC 220 240 V 310 W  Temperature range  5   35  C  Operating         o ob    C   5   35  C  Operating         o ob       Size 317  W  x 98  H  x 288  D  m  2 AE D n protruding Darts  Please refer to the following figure     Weight  mass  approx  aprox 3 5kg o OS 5 aprox 3 5kg 22 L     Computer input port HDMI input port   COMPUTER IN 1 HDMI connector x1  D sub 15 pin mini x1 Audio input output port   COMPUTER IN2 AUDIO IN1 Stereo mini x1  D sub 15 pin mini x1 AUDIO IN2 Stereo mini x1   Computer output port AUDIO IN3  R  L    Ports MONITOR OUT AUDIO OUT  R  L    D sub 15 pin mini x1 Others   Video input port USB TYPEA   Y  Cb Pb  Cr Pr  Component video  USB TYPE B    i   CONTROL i    Lamp  DT01021   Filter set  MU06481   Mounting accessar
129. and on   the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following  measures      Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna      Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver      Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver  is connected      Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help    INSTRUCTIONS TO USERS  This equipment complies with the requirements of FCC   Federal Communication Commission  equipment provided that the following conditions  are met  Some cables have to be used with the core set  Use the accessory cable or a  designated type cable for the connection  For cables that have a core only at one end   connect the core to the projector    CAUTION  Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for  compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment     For the Customers in CANADA  NOTICE  This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003     Warranty And After Service    Unless seen any abnormal operations  mentioned with the first paragraph of   WARNING in this manual   when a problem occurs with the equipment  first refer to the   Troubleshooting  section of the  Operating Guide   and run through the suggested checks   If this does not resolve the problem contact your dealer or service company  They will tell  you what warranty condition is applied     Introduction                 3  Featu
130. and review all suggested check points  After that  please contact your  dealer or service company  if you still have the problem  They will tell you what  warranty condition is applied     92    Projector    CP X2011N CP X2511N  ICP X3011N CP X4011N    User s Manual  concise           ENGLISH  E    Thank you for purchasing this projector   Please read through this manual before using this product  in order to use safely  and utilize well the product     AWARNING    Before using this product  be sure to read all manuals for this  product     117  19  After reading them  store them in a safe place for future  reference     gt  Heed all the warnings and cautions in the manuals or on the product     gt  Follow all the instructions in the manuals or on the product     NOTE   In this manual  unless any comments are accompanied     the    manuals  means all the documents provided with this product  and  the product   means this projector and all the accessories came with the projector        Contents   Ea  a  First Of allie ettet 2 Connecting power supply                     9  Entries and graphical symbols explanation      2   Turning on the power                           9  Important safety instruction                                2 Adjusting the projector s elevator       10  Regulatory notices                               3 Displaying the picture                         11  About Electro Magnetic Interference                  3 Turning off the power                         1
131. anel resolution  before being displayed  The best display performance will be achieved if the  resolutions of the input signal and the projector panel are identical      If you connect this projector and a notebook computer  you need output the  display to an external monitor  or output simultaneously to the internal display  and an external monitor  Consult the computer s manual for the setting      Depending on the input signal  the automatic adjustment function of this  projector may take some time and not function correctly      Note that a composite sync signal or sync on green signal may confuse the  automatic adjustment function of this projector  R438       If the automatic adjustment function does not work correctly  you may not see  the dialog to set the display resolution  In such a case  use an external display  device  You may be able to see the dialog and set an appropriate display  resolution         continued on next page     Connecting with your devices  continued       If you insert a USB storage device  such as a USB memory  into the USB TYPE  A port and select the port as the input source  you can view images stored in the  device    173       You can connect a dynamic microphone to the MIC port with a 3 5 mm mini plug   In that case  the built in speaker outputs the sound from the microphone  even  while the sound from the projector is output  You can input line level signal to the  MIC port from equipment such as wireless microphone  Select HIGH in the M
132. ansmitting and  receiving data at the same time      HALF DUPLEX is selected as the default setting       f you select HALF DUPLEX  check the setting of   the item RESPONSE LIMIT TIME    158      57    Description          SERVICE COMMUNICATION   continued   continued      continued on next page     58       RESPONSE LIMIT TIME  Select the time period to wait for receiving  response data from other device communicating by  the NETWORK BRIDGE and the HALF DUPLEX  through the CONTROL port   OFF o 1s    2s    3s   EL             j     OFF  Select this mode if it is not required to check  the responses from the device that the projector  sends data to  In this mode  the projector can    send out data from the computer continuously    1s  2s  3s  Select the time period to keep the  projector waiting for response from the device  that the projector sends data to  While waiting the  response  the projector does not send out any  data from the CONTROL port       This menu is available only when the NETWORK  BRIDGE is selected for the COMMUNICATION  TYPE and the HALF DUPLEX is selected for the  TRANSMISSION METHOD    157       OFF is selected as the default setting        Description          SERVICE   continued        INFORMATION  Selecting this item displays a dialog titled  INPUT INFORMATION    It shows the information about the current input       The    FRAME LOCK    message on the dialog means the frame lock  function is working     The    SCART RGB    message means the COMPONEN
133. ator Status Note          The network connection to the projector is    Nor conngcrd not established yet        The network connection is established  but  the image transmissions on hold     Hold       The network connection is established and  Connected the images on the computer are being sent  to the projector        The network connection to the projector is    Disconnected   disconnected           2  Status Display in Multi PC mode  The icon is displayed at the right end of the Display mode buttons   One of the following icons to inform which quarter screens are used will be  shown     Status Status icon          No computer is on screen       One computer is on screen  Ej E  EE  EEJ              Two computers are on screen  fa E  ER     ES ER        Three computers are on screen        Four computers are on screen        39    2 1 Using the  LiveViewer   continued     2 1 3 Switching the display mode    The    LiveViewer    has the Single PC mode and Multi PC mode  The modes can be  switched on the main menu     1  Click the  amp  button on the main menu   The buttons below are displayed                 0     ARAA    Ad       Tas     9 Status Display       2  Select from    to    buttons  and click it      Switching to the Single PC mode   Your image is displayed on full screen        Switching to the Multi PC mode   Your image is displayed on a quarter  screen identified in the button     3  The projector screen is switched to the mode selected above  and the  transmi
134. broken  etc   If an   abnormality should occur  unplug the projector urgently     gt  Situate the product away from children and pets     gt  Do not use the product when there is fear of a thunderbolt     gt  Unplug the projector from the power outlet if the projector is not used for the   time being     gt  Do not open or remove any portion of the product  unless the manuals direct   it  For internal maintenance  leave it to your dealer or their service personnel     gt  Use only the accessories specified or recommended by the manufacturer     gt  Do not modify the projector or accessories     gt  Do not let any things or any liquids enter to the inside of the product     gt  Do not wet the product     gt  Do not apply a shock or pressure to this product      Do not place the product on an unstable place such as the uneven surface or  the leaned table      Do not place the product unstably  Place the projector so that it does not  protrude from the surface where the projector is placed on      Remove all the attachments including the power cord and cables  from the  projector when carrying the projector     gt  Do not look into the lens and the openings on the projector  while the lamp is   on     gt  Do not approach the lamp cover and the exhaust vents  while the projection   lamp is on  Also after the lamp goes out  do not approach them for a while  since   too hot     Regulatory notices  About Electro Magnetic Interference    In CANADA  This Class B digital apparatus comp
135. buttons   You can display a test pattern for checking the effect of your  adjustment by pressing the ENTER button   Each time you press the ENTER button  the pattern changes as below   No pattern  gt  Gray scale of 9 steps  gt      tL  Ramp    Gray scale of 15 steps      Lines or other noise might appear on the screen  when this function is operated  but it is not a  malfunction     Using the  lt  P gt  buttons adjusts the strength of whole color   Weak    Strong      This item can be selected only for a video  s video and component   video signal      For an HDMI signal  this item can also be selected if either  1  or  2  applies     1  HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to VIDEO     2  HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to AUTO  and the  projector recognizes that it receives video signals     Using the  lt   gt  buttons adjusts the tint   Reddish Greenish      This item can be selected only for a video  s video and component   video signal      For an HDMI signal  this item can also be selected if either  1  or  2  applies     1  HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to VIDEO     2  HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to AUTO  and the  projector recognizes that it receives video signals         continued on next page  31    Item    Description          SHARPNESS    ACTIVE IRIS    MY MEMORY    32    Using the  lt   gt  buttons adjusts the sharpness    Weak    Strong    There may be some noise and or the screen may flicker for a  moment when an adjustm
136. click the left button on the    mouse     4  The setting information of the selected profile data is shown      If the DHCP is set on in the projector  the network connection between the  projector and computer may not be established since IP address may be varied   If you like to use the Profile connection  set the DHCP off in the projector        23    1 6 Manual configuration  continued     1 6 2 History connection        The  LiveViewer  can memory the network  settings when connecting to the projector as             Select the manual connection method you woukd Mor to us       projector        o ee    a history record  After that  selecting a history Poena     Date via            record can quickly connect the network with the diem i een    TED       1  Select the  History      2  Choose a history record listed in the window           3  Click the  Connect      4  The network connection will be established   Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination     130     If you want to copy a history record to a profile data  select one of the history  record and click the  Register to profile   The profile data cannot be erased  automatically     NOTE   The number of the history record is maximum 10 for each network  adapter  When the 11th data is stored  the oldest record among the 10 will be  overwritten      The data  amp  time information in each history record is renewed when the  network is connected by using the history record       If the DHCP is s
137. code and any    other code     Commands are not accepted during warm up        2  Response code   Error code   h  shows hexadecimal   The connection ID is attached for the TCP 23 s response   error codes are  used  The connection ID is same as the sending command format    1  ACK reply   06h   xxh  xxh   connection ID    2  NAK reoly   15h   xxh   3  Error reply   1Ch   0000h   xxh   4  Data reply   1Dh   xxxxh   xxh   5  Authentication error reply   1Fh   0400h   xxh   6  Projector busy reply  1Fh   xxxxh   xxh  When the projector is too busy to receives the command  the projector  returens the error code   In such a case  check the sending code and send the same command again     Automatic Connection Break    The TCP connection will be automatically disconnected after there is no  communication for 30 seconds after being established     Authentication  The projector does not accept commands without authentication success  when authentication is enabled  The projector uses a challenge response type  authentication with an MD5  Message Digest 5  algorithm  When the projector is  using a LAN  a random 8 bytes will be returned if authentication is enabled  Bind  this received 8 bytes and the authentication password and digest this data with  the MD5 algorithm and add this in front of the commands to send   Following is a sample if the authentication password is set to  password  and the  random 8 bytes are    a572f60c      1  Select the projector   2  Receive the random 8 bytes
138. cription          SNMP Port    Configures the SNMP port        Port open    Click the  Enable  check box to use SNMP        Trap address    Configures the destination of the SNMP Trap in IP format      The address allows not only IP address but also domain  name if the valid DNS server is setup in the Network  Settings  The maximum length of host or domain name is up    to 255 characters        Download MIB file    Downloads a MIB file from the projector        twork Bridge Port    Configures the Bridge port number        Port Number             Input the port number    Except for 9715  9716  9719  9720  5900  5500  4352  between 1024 and 65535 can be set up  It is set to 9717 as  the default setting     Click the  Apply  button to save the settings     NOTE   The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the  network connection  When the configuration settings are changed  you must    restart the network connection  You can restart the network connection by       clicking the  Network Restart  on the main menu     51    3 5 Mail Settings       Displays and configures e mail addressing settings     Item Description          Click the  Enable  check box to use the e mail function   Send Mail Configure the conditions for sending e mail under the Alert  Settings        Configures the address of the mail server in IP format      The address allows not only IP address but also domain  SMTP Server Address name if the valid DNS server is setup in the Network  Setting
139. ded  out  appearance  or  Color tone is  poor     Pictures appear  dark     Pictures appear  blurry     RS 232C does  not work     The FREEZE function is working   Press FREEZE button to restore the screen to normal     Color settings are not correctly adjusted    Perform picture adjustments by changing the COLOR TEMP  COLOR   TINT and or COLOR SPACE settings  using the menu functions   COLOR SPACE setting is not suitable     Change the COLOR SPACE setting to AUTO  RGB   SMPTE240  REC709 or REC601     The brightness and or contrast are adjusted to an  extremely low level    Adjust BRIGHTNESS and or CONTRAST settings to a  higher level using the menu function     25       The projector is operating in Eco mode   Set ECO MODE to NORMAL  and set AUTO ECO MODE to  OFF  in the SETUP menu     The lamp is approaching the end of its product lifetime   Replace the lamp     Either the focus and or horizontal phase settings are  not properly adjusted    Adjust the focus using the focus ring  and or H PHASE  using the menu function           The lens is dirty or misty   Clean the lens referring to the section  Caring for the lens      The SAVING function is working   Select NORMAL for STANDBY MODE item in the SETUP  menu     The COMMUNICATION TYPE for the CONTROL port is  set to NETWORK BRIDGE    Select OFF for COMMUNICATION TYPE item in the  OPTION   SERVICE   COMMUNICATION menu      continued on next page           97    Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects  co
140. des are combinations of GAMMA and COLOR TEMP  settings  Choose a suitable mode according to the projected source   C NORMAL    CINEMA  amp  DYNAMIC  amp  BOARD BLACK  7  DAYTIME  lt  WHITEBOARD  amp  BOARD GREEN    GAMMA COLOR TEMP  NORMAL 1 DEFAULT 2 MID  CINEMA 2 DEFAULT 3LOW  PICTURE MODE DYNAMIC 3 DEFAULT 1 HIGH  BOARD BLACK  4 DEFAULT 4 Hi BRIGHT 1  BOARD GREEN  4 DEFAULT 5 Hi BRIGHT 2  WHITEBOARD 5 DEFAULT 2 MID  DAYTIME 6 DEFAULT 6 Hi BRIGHT 3    When the combination of GAMMA and COLOR TEMP differs  from pre assigned modes above  the display on the menu for the  PICTURE MODE is    CUSTOM     Please refer to the GAMMA and  COLOR TEMP    130  31  items in PICTURE menu     Lines or other noise might appear on the screen when this function  is operated  but it is not a malfunction      continued on next page     28    Item    Description          ECO MODE    MIRROR    RESET    FILTER TIME    LANGUAGE    ADVANCED MENU       Using the  lt  P gt  buttons turns off on the Eco mode   See the ECO MODE item in SETUP menu    141      Using the  lt   gt  buttons switches the mode for mirror status   See the MIRROR item in SETUP menu    141      Performing this item resets all of the EASY MENU items except the  FILTER TIME and LANGUAGE    A dialog is displayed for confirmation  Selecting the OK using the  gt   button performs resetting     The usage time of the air filter is shown in the menu    Performing this item resets the filter time which counts usage time  of the air filter  
141. displayed  Enter  IP address and subnet mask   then click the   OK   Procedure to connect to the projector  will start    Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the  connection to your destination     130    If you click the  Cancel   you will return to the  dialog for adding a Network configuration        28    1 7 Configuring the network settings manually  continued        If the entered IP address and projector s IP ARE ABRE Schad HR ATsS dU cicer asi a  address are the same  a warning dialog shown Pisa chosa an Adress tat curri no n us   to the right will be displayed    Click the  OK   and then enter a different IP   address from the projector s one in the dialog   for changing Network configuration     EE  If the connection is not available with the SUGAR  entered Network configuration  a warning  dialog shown to the right will be displayed   Click the  OK  to return to the dialog for  changing the Network configuration  and then  enter appropriate configuration          NOTE   If a Network configuration to connect to the projector has been added  on the computer  the added Network configuration will be erased once the    application software is closed        E Are you sure you want to connect the selected projector        The message is appeared when the wireless  adapter you selected is already used for  another network connection     Ar you sure you want to connect the selected projector       To connect  click the  Yes   Proceed to item  1 8 Confirming the connection to you
142. dled remote control are assigned to the Web Remote  Control screen     Item Description          POWER Assigned the same operation as STANDBY ON button        COMPUTER Assigned the same operation as COMPUTER button        VIDEO Assigned the same operation as VIDEO button        BLANK Assigned the same operation as BLANK button        FREEZE Assigned the same operation as FREEZE button        MUTE Assigned the same operation as MUTE button        MENU Assigned the same operation as MENU button        Assigned the same operation as A button        Assigned the same operation as V button        Assigned the same operation as  lt  button        Assigned the same operation as    button        ENTER Assigned the same operation as ENTER button        RESET Assigned the same operation as RESET button        PAGE UP Assigned the same operation as PAGE UP button        PAGE DOWN Assigned the same operation as PAGE DOWN button        SLIDESHOW Starts the Slideshow        NOTE     The Web Remote Control does not support repeat function that  performs an action while holding a button clicked down      Since the repeat function is not available  click the button repeatedly as many  times as you require      Even if you hold the button clicked down for a while  the Web Remote Control  sends your request command one time only  Release the button  then click it again     When the  POWER  button is pushed  a message window comes up to confirm  the operation  If you wish to turn it off  push th
143. down  please make confirmation of  the attachment state of the lamp and lamp cover  and  then turn the power on again     The signal cables are not correctly connected   Correctly connect the connection cables        Signal source does not correctly work     Correctly set up the signal source device by referring to  the manual of the source device        The input changeover settings are mismatched   Select the input signal  and correct the settings        The BLANK function for pictures and the MUTE  function for sounds are working    AV MUTE may be active    Refer to the item    Sound does not come out    and    No  pictures are displayed    on the next page to turn off the  MUTE and BLANK functions      Continued on next page           95    Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects  continued     Reference  page    9 13    Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect          The signal cables are not correctly connected   Correctly connect the audio cables        The MUTE function is working   Restore the sound pressing MUTE or VOLUME     button 18  on the remote control        The volume is adjusted to an extremely low level     Adjust the volume to a higher level using the menu function  or the remote control     The AUDIO SOURCE SPEAKER setting is not correct   Correctly set the AUDIO SOURCE SPEAKER in AUDIO menu   The mode selected for HDMI AUDIO is not suitable     Check each of the two modes provided and select the suit   able one for your HD
144. ds to send     Following is a sample if the Authentication Password is set to    password    and the  random 8 bytes are    a572f60c        1  Select the projector    2  Receive the random 8 bytes  a572f60c  from the projector    3  Bind the random 8 bytes    a572f60c    and the Authentication Password   password  and it becomes    a572f60cpassword       4  Digest this bind  a572f60cpassword  with MD5 algorithm   It will be    e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde       5  Add this  e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde  in front of the commands  and send the data   Send  e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde   command    6  When the sending data is correct  the command will be performed and the  reply data will be returned  Otherwise  an authentication error will be returned     NOTE   As for the transmission of the second or subsequent commands  the  authentication data can be omitted when the same connection     88    eje IreJU o   S XsinY6J6  UfT6     Likely Cause    Things to Check    Reference  Page  Number          No image    The projector is not turned  on     Is the projector s lamp on      17       The projector s input source  isn t switched to LAN     Is the projector switched to  LAN      18   19       Q  o  2  2  D  Q      o  2   gt   o     a  D  z  g     o  E  EI    The projector  that you want  to connect to is  nowhere to be  found on the  list of available  projectors    The computer and or  projector s network settings  are not configured correctly     Check the network 
145. e       E2117  19        Turning off the power  Press the STANDBY ON button on the WERDE    projector or the remote control   The message  Power off   will appear on oe 1 o ic  the screen for about 5 seconds  AN FX  2 Press the STANDBY ON button again    while the message appears   The projector lamp will go off  and the                                  ess    POWER indicator will begin blinking in Bog  orange  Then the POWER indicator will S695  stop blinking and light in steady orange Te    when the lamp cooling is complete   3 Attach the lens cover  after the POWER    indicator turns in steady orange     Do not turn the projector on for about 10 minutes or more after turning it off     Turning the projector on again too soon could shorten the lifetime of some  consumable parts of the projector     i       ANWARNING PDo not touch around the lamp cover and the exhaust vents  during use or just after use  since it is too hot     gt  Remove the power cord for complete separation  The power outlet should be  close to the projector and easily accessible     NOTE   Please power off the projector after any connected devices are  powered off       This projector has the AUTO OFF function that can make the projector turn off  automatically  For more information  please see    Operating Guide    L317  19        Replacing the lamp   A lamp has finite product life  Using the lamp for long periods of time could cause  the pictures darker or the color tone poor  Note that each lamp has a
146. e      Configures the text of the e mail to be sent   The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric  characters  but if you are using some of special characters  below the length may be shorter    Special characters      amp   96 and space   Except Cold Start and Authentication Failure            Alarm Time          Send Mail       Mail Subject       Mail Text          Click the  Apply  button to save the settings     NOTE   The trigger of Filter Error e mail is depending on the FILTER  MESSAGE setting in the SERVICE item of the OPTION menu which defines  the period until the filter message is displayed on the projector screen  The  e mail will be sent when the filter timer exceeds 100  200  500  1000  2000 or  5000 hours based on the configuration  No notification e mail will be sent if  the FILTER MESSAGE is set to TURN OFF   EQOPTION menu in the User s  Manual     Operating Guide       Lamp Time Alarm is defined as a threshold for e mail notification  reminder   of the lamp timer  When the lamp hour exceeds this threshold that is configured  through the Web page  the e mail will be sent out      Filter Time Alarm is defined as a threshold for e mail notification  reminder   of the filter time  When the filter hour exceeds this threshold that is configured  in the Web page  the e mail will be sent out        54    3 7 Schedule Settings         Senato                  Displays and configures schedule settings     Description          Daily Configures the daily schedu
147. e  OK   otherwise push the  Cancel      The  PAGE DOWN  and  PAGE UP  buttons on the Web Remote Control  cannot be used as mouse emulation function of the projector        3 12 Projector Status       Displays and configures the current projector status     Item Description          Error Status Displays the current error status  Lamp Time Displays the usage time for the current lamp   Filter Time Displays the usage time for the current filter              Power Status Displays the current power status   Input Status Displays the current input signal source   Blank On Off Displays the current Blank on off status   Mute Displays the current Mute on off status   Freeze Displays the current Freeze status                       68    3 13 Network Restart          Restarts the projector s network connection     Description          Restarts the projector s network connection in order to  activate new configuration settings        Restart    NOTE   Restarting requires you to re log on in order to further control or  configure the projector via a web browser  Wait 30 seconds or more after  clicking the  Restart  button to log on again        69    4 My lmage Eunctiom    The projector can display still images that are transferred via the network        Display image data       B           MY IMAGE transmission requires an exclusive application for your computer    PJImg Projector Image Tool  is necessary to use MY IMAGE transmission    It can be downloaded from the Hitachi web site  ht
148. e  on your computer     31    1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination  continued   1 8 2 Connection error    When the connection to the projector could not  be established  an error message     Network  Connection not established     will come up     Click the  OK  then the    LiveViewer    main  menu is displayed even though the network  is not established  Click     on the main menu  to go back to item 1 5 Selecting the network  connection method     14        NOTE   If you selected the My Connection  the    LiveViewer    is closed  Check  the network setting in the projector  and retry the connection from item 1 3 2    Staring the    LiveViewer      19        32    1 9 Profile data    1 9 1 Outline of Profile data    The network setting to connect the projector and computer can be stored as a  profile data  Once the data is stored  all you need to do is to select the data to  connect to the network  It is recommended when the same network connection is  often used     1 9 2 Making Profile data    The profile data is made on the Manual  Configuration screen   423    Up to 10 profile data can be stored for each  network adapter     Projector Connection       Select the manual connection method you woud lae to us              Date costed  11 30 2009 3 19 46 PM  11 20 2009 2 19 41 PM             t   owes   My Connection      1  Select the  Profile  and click the  New   D              promo Ne  168 1 101 11 20 2000 3 REM  Promctors 1921681103 11 30 2009 32124 M    Con
149. e User s Manual   Network Guide            continued on next page     56    Item    Description          SERVICE COMMUNICATION   continued   continued      continued on next page     COMMUNICATION TYPE  Select the communication type for transmission via  the CONTROL port     NETWORK BRIDGE    OFF    NETWORK BRIDGE  Select this type  if it is required  to control an external device as a network terminal   via this projector from the computer    The CONTROL port doesn t accept RS 232C  commands  Network Bridge Function in the  User s Manual   Network Guide    OFF  Select this mode to receive RS 232C  commands using the CONTROL port      OFF is selected as the default setting      When you select the NETWORK BRIDGE  check   the item  TRANSMISSTION METHOD  below               SERIAL SETTINGS  Select the serial communication condition for the  CONTROL port     BAUD RATE  4800bps   9600bps      19200bps   38400bps  fM       PARITY  NONE  amp  ODD  amp  EVEN  fEL                j      The BAUD RATE is fixed to 19200bps and PARITY  is fixed NONE when the COMMUNICATION TYPE  is set to OFF  above      TRANSMISSION METHOD   Select the transmission method for communication by   the NETWORK BRIDGE from the CONTROL port    HALF DUPLEX    amp  FULL DUPLEX   HALF DUPLEX  This method lets the projector  make two way communication  but only one  direction  either transmitting or receiving data  is  allowed at a time    FULL DUPLEX  This method lets the projector  make two way communication  tr
150. e elevator feet can be manually twisted to make more precise    adjustments  Hold the projector when twisting the feet     c RON           To loose an elevator foot  push the    elevator button on the same side as it  To finely adjust  twist the foot        Adjusting the zoom and focus          i j   777       Zoom ring  1   Use the zoom ring to adjust the screen size  E SAH  2 Use the focus ring to focus the picture  cdi        Using the automatic adjustment feature    Press AUTO button on the remote control     Pressing this button performs the following     O For a computer signal  The vertical position  the horizontal position and the horizontal  phase will be automatically adjusted   Make sure that the application window is set to its maximum size  prior to attempting to use this feature  A dark picture may still be  incorrectly adjusted  Use a bright picture when adjusting    O For a video signal and s video signal  The video format best suited for the respective input signal will be selected  automatically  This function is available only when the AUTO is selected for  the VIDEO FORMAT item in the INPUT menu  137   The vertical position and  horizontal position will be automatically set to the default    O For a component video signal  The vertical position and horizontal position will be automatically set to the default   The horizontal phase will be automatically adjusted     e The automatic adjustment operation requires approx  10 seconds  Also please  note that it 
151. e network connection mode       After starting the    LiveViewer     the  Select the       Network Connection  screen comes up  P MACUK ee  Select the network connection that you would like a         to use  There are 3 options in the menu  Wrdkes Network Connex    1137B9 Wrdkes LAN Mani PCI Ee    Wireless LAN T    Wired LAN pigs    My Connection  ww   oe      If you select either the wireless LAN or wired LAN  proceed to item 1 4 1 Selecting either  the wireless LAN or wired LAN    below   If you select My Connection  jump to item 1 4 2 Selecting My Connection     412     NOTE   This dialog will not be displayed if the computer has just one network adapter  and no My Connection is registered  Proceed to item 1 5 Selecting the network  connection method   14       Select Wireless LAN only when you connect the computer and the access point via  wireless network and connect the access point and the projector via wired network   since the projector doesn t have wireless LAN function        1 4 1 Selecting either the wireless LAN or wired LAN    If you select either the wireless LAN or wired LAN   a list of the network adapters in your computer is Pama UE  shown in the menu       Select what you like to use in the list  and click the   Next     Then  proceed to item 1 5 Selecting the network  connection method     114        NOTE   If you select the wireless LAN  the wireless LAN adapters in your computer  are shown in the list     If the wired LAN is selected  the wired LAN adap
152. eViewer   or when the LAN port is not selected as input source       If no communication between the projector and computer in 5 minutes  the  Passcode will be changed        1 5 Selecting the network connection method  continued      2  Entering the Passcode    If you select  Enter PassCode  at item 1 5   the    Please enter the PassCode    screen is  displayed  Please enter the Passcode divided  4 digit each in 3 boxes  total 12 digit         Example PASSCODE  1234   5678   9ABC The Pazode  amp  a 12t code  that can be found on the Startup  Screen of the projector you are curently trying to connect to     Bxk   xm   et         After entering the Passcode  click the  Connect  to start the connection to the  projector     Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination     130     If you click the  Back   the screen is back to item 1 5 Selecting the network  connection method     114     NOTE      When entering the Passcode  capital and small letters are not  distinguished      If you are using a Subnet mask other than Class A  B or C  you will have to  establish the connection manually    If the manual setting screen is displayed  please follow item 1 5 1  3      21         Troubleshooting   E Incorrect PassCode     The incorrect Passcode was input     Click the  Back  to return to the  Please  enter the PassCode    screen     Check the PassCode on the projector  screen  015  and enter the code again        17    1 5 Selecting the network connection method 
153. ecting  with the  LiveViewer         Images  contain lots of  interference     The compression rate being  used for transferring the  images is too high     Try setting the priority to  Image  Quality  in the  LiveViewer   Option menu  You may  experience a drop in speed        Two cursors  appear    Cursor of the computer  and cursor of the projector  are displayed coming in  succession     Turn off the cursor Emulation  of the  LiveViewer  option        No cursor  appears    Some computers do not  display the cursor in the   LiveViewer      Turn on the cursor Emulation  of the  LiveViewer  option        Neither transparency  nor translucency  effects  Glass           Using the  LiveViewer  with  Windows Aero mode      continued on next page        The  LiveViewer  does not  support these features of  Windows Vista Aero           8  Troubleshooting  Continued     Problem    Likely Cause    Things to Check    Reference  Page  Number          Others     Information from the  projector to computer is  not correct or completed     The projector does not  respond     Image on screen is  frozen        Communication between  the projector and computer  is not working well     NETWORK Functions of  the projector is not working  well        Try  NETWORK RESTART   in SERVICE menu under  the NETWORK menu             User s Manual   Operating Guide    91    Ce Warrantycandiafterssales service    If a problem occurs with the equipment  please read 8  Troubleshooting  189   section first 
154. ector  you can select the display mode on the  projector from two options below     Single PC mode  displays the image of the selected  MULTI PC computer on full screen   MODE   Multi PC mode  displays the images sent from up to  four computers on screen that is divided into quarter  sections   Select this item to display a dialog   Use the dialog to change the display mode as  explained below               continued on next page     64    Description          MULTI PC  MODE   continued     PRESENTATION   continued     DISPLAY  USER NAME     continued on next page          To change from Multi PC mode to Single PC mode   select one of computers in the dialog using the  A Y    lt  P buttons and press the ENTER or INPUT  button    Press the    button to choose OK  and then press  ENTER or INPUT again  The image for the selected  computer is displayed on full screen      To change from Single PC mode to Multi PC mode   press 9   button to choose OK in the dialog and press  the ENTER or INPUT button    The display mode is changed      For details on how to switch   the display mode to Multi PC   mode on your computer  see   the section Switching the E     display mode in the User s Manual     Network Guide     The Presenter mode setting of the selected  computer becomes valid when the display mode is  changed to Single PC mode  00E   Also  the Presenter mode setting   becomes invalid when the   display mode is changed to Multi   PC mode  regardless the setting   on the computers 
155. ector is in  standby mode if the STANDBY MODE item of SETUP menu is set to SAVING   Please connect the network communication to the projector after setting the  STANDBY MODE to NORMAL    141      Description          Selecting this item displays the SETUP  Menu for the network    Use the A V buttons to select an item   and the    or ENTER button on the remote  control to perform the item     Use the A V buttons to turn DHCP on off     ON  amp  OFF    Select OFF when the network does not have  DHCP DHCP enabled   Taa   When the    DHCP    setting changes to  ON   it  Protocol  i little time to obtain IP address from DHCP    Auto IP function will be assigned an IP address if  the projector could not obtain an IP address from  server even if DHCP is    ON            continued on next page     60    Description    Use the A W  lt   gt  buttons to enter the IP  ADDRESS    This function can only be used when DHCP is set  to OFF     IP ADDRESS      The IP ADDRESS is the number that identifies  this projector on the network  You cannot have two  devices with the same IP ADDRESS on the same  network      The IP ADDRESS    0 0 0 0    is prohibited     Use the A W  lt   gt  buttons to enter the same  SUBNET MASK used by your computer     SUBNET This function can only be used when DHCP is set  MASK   to OFF       The SUBNET MASK  0 0 0 0  is prohibited     Use the A     lt  P buttons to enter the DEFAULT   GATEWAY  a node on a computer network that  DEFAULT serves as an access point to a
156. ed        60    3 10 Projector Control           77 The items shown in the table below can be  performed using the Projector Control menu   Select an item using the up and down arrow keys  on the computer    Most of the items have a submenu  Refer to the  table below for details        NOTE   The setting value may not match with the actual value if the user  changes the value manually  In that case  please refresh the page by clicking  the  Refresh  button        Controls the projector     Item Description          MAIN  POWER Turns the power on off    INPUT SOURCE Selects the input source   PICTURE MODE Selects the picture mode setting   BLANK ON OFF Turns Blank on off    MUTE Turns Mute on off    FREEZE Turns Freeze on off     Controls the magnify setting   MAGNIFY In some input signal sources  it might stop  Magnify  even  though it does not reach to maximum setting value     MAGNIFY POSITION V   Adjusts the vertical magnify position   MAGNIFY POSITION H   Adjusts the horizontal magnify position   TEMPLATE Turns template on off    MY IMAGE Selects MY IMAGE data    MY IMAGE DELETE   Deletes MY IMAGE data                                                  61    3 10 Projector Control  Continued                                                                                                                    Item Description  PICTURE  BRIGHTNESS Adjusts the brightness setting   CONTRAST Adjusts the contrast setting   GAMMA Selects the gamma setting   COLOR TEMP Selects the colo
157. ed off  the Enter PIN Code box will be displayed  Enter the registered PIN code   The projector can be used after entering the registered PIN code  If an  incorrect PIN code is input  the Enter PIN code box will be displayed again     PIN LOCK If an incorrect PIN code is input 3 times  the projector will turn off  Afterwards  the projector will turn off every time an incorrect PIN code is input  The  projector will also turn off if there is no key input for about 5 minutes while  the Enter PIN code box is displayed    This function will activate only when the projector is started after AC power  is turned off       Please do not forget your PIN code     2 Turning off the PIN LOCK   2 1 Follow the procedure in 1 1 to display the PIN LOCK on off menu    2 2 Use the A Y buttons to select OFF and the Enter PIN Code box will be  displayed   Enter the registered PIN code to turn the PIN LOCK function off    If an incorrect PIN Code is input 3 times  the menu will close     3 If you have forgotten your PIN code   3 1 While the Enter PIN code box is displayed  press and hold the RESET  button for three seconds or press and hold the INPUT button for 3  seconds while pressing the    button on the projector   The 10 digit Inquiring Code will be displayed      f there is no key input for about 5 minutes  while the Inquiring Code is displayed  the  projector will turn off    3 2 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code  Your PIN code will  be sent after your user registration 
158. en Display     BRIGHTNESS    RETURN      FILTER TIME        RESET 1234h  EXIT  gt  OK       The meanings of the general words on the OSD are as follows        Indication Meaning    EXIT Selecting this word finishes the OSD menu  It s the same as  pressing the MENU button     RETURN Selecting this word returns the menu to the previous menu     Selecting this word cancels the operation in the present  AROEN PENN menu and returns to the previous menu           Selecting this word executes the prepared function or shifts  the menu to the next menu     OK or YES          27    EASY  MENU    From the EASY MENU  items shown in the table  amp  EASY MENU     SELECT  below can be performed       d   AUTO KEYSTONE EXECUTE   Select an item using the A V cursor buttons  Then ICE  0            Y PICTURE MODE NORMAL  perform it according to the following table  3k ECO MODE NORMAL       MIRROR NORMAL  5 RESET EXECUTE  FILTER TIME    LANGUAGE  w ADVANCED MENU  EXIT       Item Description          ASPECT Using the  lt  P gt  buttons switches the mode for aspect ratio   See the ASPECT item in IMAGE menu    33      Using the    button executes the auto keystone function   AUTO KEYSTONE   See the AUTO KEYSTONE  EXECUTE  item in SETUP menu    240      Using the  lt  P gt  buttons corrects the vertical keystone distortion   KEYSTONE   See the KEYSTONE item in SETUP menu  2140                                                      Using the  lt   gt  buttons switches the picture mode    The picture mo
159. ent is made  This is not a malfunction     This item is available only for CP X2511N  CP X3011N or CP X4011N   Using the A V cursor buttons changes the active iris control mode     PRESENTATION    amp  THEATER  amp  OFF  ft tt  PRESENTATION   The active iris displays the best presentation  image for both bright and dark scenes   THEATER   The active iris displays the best theater image for  both bright and dark scenes    OFF   The active iris is always open     The screen may flicker when the PRESENTATION or THEATER  modes are selected  If this occurs select OFF           This projector has 4 memories for adjustment data  for all the items  of the PICTURE menu    Selecting a function using the A V buttons and pressing the  gt  or  ENTER button performs each function     ieee     SAVE 2  amp  SAVE 3     SAVE 4   LOAD 4  amp LOAD 3  amp  LOAD 2  amp  LOAD 1   SAVE 1  SAVE 2  SAVE 3  SAVE 4  Performing a SAVE function saves the current adjustment data into  the memory linked in the number included in the function s name     Remember that the current data being stored of a memory will be  lost by saving new data into the memory     LOAD 1  LOAD 2  LOAD 3  LOAD 4   Performing a LOAD function loads the data from the memory linked  in the number included in the function s name  and adjusts the  picture automatically depending on the data      The LOAD functions whose linked memory has no data are  skipped      Remember that the current adjusted condition will be lost by  loading dat
160. ent video    signals    2138       When the USB TYPE B port and the computer s type A USB port are connected   you can use the USB TYPE B port as a picture input port from the computer  or use  the remote control as a simple mouse and keyboard of the computer     116  51      Computer          VCR DVD Blu ray Disc  player                            IINGH                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  A  1 S   NN a exc  ic HD E59 ejr  IN2   d ee         amp  use 7 Fc COMPUTER INT S D   CSV 05A     x      amp   i UN     ER    bout f  am Ji  e x   UO LE 8                                                                        continued on next page     Connecting with your devices  continued     NOTE   Before connecting the projector to a computer  consult the computer s  manual and check the compatibility of the signal level  the synchronization  methods and the display resolution output to the projector      Some signal may need an adapter to input this projector      Some computers have multiple screen display modes that may include some  signals which are not supported by this projector      Although the projector can display signals with resolution up to UXGA   1600X1200   the signal will be converted to the projector s p
161. er stepped on nor pinched out     ANCAUTION     Do not turn on or off the projector while connected to a device   in operation  unless that is directed in the manual of the device  Otherwise it may   cause malfunction in the device or projector     gt  Be careful not to mistakenly connect a connector to a wrong port  Otherwise it   may cause malfunction in the device or projector      When connecting a connector to a port  make sure that the shape of the  connector fits the port      Tighten the screws to connect a connector equipped with screws to a port      Use the cables with straight plugs  not L shaped ones  as the input ports of the  projector are recessed     About Plug and Play capability     Plug and Play is a system composed of a computer  its operating system  and peripheral equipment  i e  display devices   This projector is VESA DDC  2B compatible  Plug and Play can be used by connecting this projector to a  computer that is VESA DDC  display data channel  compatible       Take advantage of this feature by connecting a computer cable to the  COMPUTER IN1 port  DDC 2B compatible   Plug and Play may not work  properly if any other type of connection is attempted      Please use the standard drivers in your computer as this projector is a Plug and   Play monitor         continued on next page     Connecting with your devices  continued     When AUTO is selected for the COMPUTER IN1 or COMPUTER IN2 port in  COMPUTER IN of the INPUT menu  that port will accept compon
162. erature exceed 35  C   If the same indication is displayed after the remedy  please set FAN  SPEED of SERVICE item in OPTION menu to HIGH    155      Blinking    It is time to clean the air filter    Please immediately turn the power off  and clean or  Lighting Simultaneous change the air filter referring to the section  Cleaning  In Green blinking in Red   and replacing the air filter   After cleaning or changing   the air filter  please be sure to reset the filter timer     After the remedy  reset the power to ON     There is a possibility that the interior portion  has become overcooled    Please use the unit within the usage temperature  parameters  5  C to 35  C     After the treatment  reset the power to ON     Lighting Alternative  In Green blinking in Red    Blinking In At least 1 Power ON schedule is saved to the  Green for   Turned   Turned   projector    approx  3 off off Please refer to Schedule Settings section of User s  seconds  Manual   Network Guide     NOTE    When the interior portion has become overheated  for safety purposes   the projector is automatically shut down  and the indicator lamps may also be  turned off  In such a case  disconnect the power cord  and wait at least 45 minutes   After the projector has sufficiently cooled down  please make confirmation of the  attachment state of the lamp and lamp cover  and then turn the power on again        Shutting the projector down EODD                Only when the projector can not be turned off by usual 
163. es  of the same type  Do not use a new battery with a used battery      Be sure to use only the batteries specified  Do not use batteries of different  types at the same time  Do not mix a new battery with used one       Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading a battery       Keep a battery away from children and pets     Do not recharge  short circuit  solder or disassemble a battery       Do not place a battery in a fire or water  Keep batteries in a dark  cool and dry place      f you observe battery leakage  wipe out the leakage and then replace a battery     If the leakage adheres to your body or clothes  rinse well with water immediately     Obey the local laws on disposing the battery           ENGLISH  B    Arrangement  Refer to the illustrations and tables below to determine screen size and projection distance   The values shown in the table are calculated for a full size screen  1024 x 768     8  Screen size  diagonal   b  Projection distance   10              2 Screen height   10      On a horizontal surface Suspended from the ceiling                                    Keep a space of 30 cm or more between the  sides of the projector and other objects such as  UNES walls  Do not place or attach anything that would  block the lens or vent holes     For the case of installation in a special state       8 f such as ceiling mount  the specified mounting                            accessories    18  and service may be required   Before 
164. et LOW BEEF   03   0600 02 F1 0100   A120 00 00  MIC LEVEL HIGH BEEF   03   0600 92 FO 0100   A120 01 00  Get BEEF   03   0600 31 F1 0200   A120 00 00  Get BEEF   03   0600 75 F1 0200   A220 00 00  MIC VOLUME Increment BEEF   03   0600 13 F1 0400   A220 00 00  Decrement BEEF   03   0600   C2F0   0500   A220 00 00  ENGLISH BE EF   03   06 00   F7 D3   01 00   05 30 00 00  FRANCAIS BE EF   03   06 00   67 D2   01 00   05 30 01 00  DEUTSCH BE EF   03   06 00   97 D2   01 00   05 30 02 00  ESPANOL BE EF   03   06 00   07 D3   01 00   05 30 03 00  ITALIANO BE EF   03   06 00   37 D1   01 00   05 30 04 00  NORSK BE EF   03   06 00   A7 DO   01 00   05 30 05 00  NEDERLANDS   BE EF   03   06 00   57 DO   01 00   05 30 06 00  Set  PORTUGUES BE EF   03   06 00   C7 D1   01 00   05 30 07 00  LANGUAGE AB BE EF   03   06 00   37 D4   01 00   05 30 08 00  Gripa BE EF   03   06 00   A7 D5   01 00   05 30 09 00  APX BE EF   03   06 00   37 DE   01 00   05 30 10 00  a2 BE EF   03   06 00   57 D5   01 00   05 30 0A 00  SVENSKA BE EF   03   06 00   C7 D4   01 00   05 30 0B 00  PYCCKMM BE EF   03   06 00   F7 D6   01 00   05 30 OC 00  SUOMI BE EF   03   06 00   67 D7   01 00   05 30 OD 00   NOTE  Not all of the languages in this table are supported               continued on next page     25                                                                                                                                                   Command Data  Names Operation Type Header CRC   Action   Type
165. et ansvar f  r eventuella fel i denna bruksanvisning    Atergivning    vers  ndande eller  anv  ndning av detta dokument eller dess inneh  ll   r inte till  ten utan uttrycklig skriftligt medgivande           OPUMEYAHME    ConepxaHue AaHHOTO pyKOBOACTBa Moxer N3MEHATbCA 6e3 npenBapurenbHoro  yBenoMneHMs    lpow3Bonuwrene He Hecer orBercrBeHHOCTM 3a OLLIMOKM B AHHOM pyKOBOAICTBe      Bocnponagegenne  nepenaua n ncnonb3oBaHne naHHoro AOKyMeHTa NNN ero conepxxaHus  sanpeuijeno 6e3 nceMeHHoro paapeureHus     HUOM    Taman ohjekirjan tiedot voivat muuttua ilman eri ilmoitusta    Valmistaja ei ota mit    n  vastuuta ohjekirjassa mahdollisesti olevista virheist      Dokumentin tai sen sis  ll  n j  ljent  minen   siirto tai k  ytt   ei ole sallittua ilmannimenomaista kirjallista valtuutusta     UWAGA    Informacje podane w tym podr  czniku mog   ulec zmianie bez uprzedzenia    Producent  nie ponosi odpowiedzialno  ci za ewentualne b    dy w podr  czniku    Powielanie  przesy  anie lub inne  wykorzystanie tego dokumentu lub jego tre  ci nie jest dozwolone bez wyra  nej pisemnej zgody     HITACHI    Inspire the Next    Hitachi America  Ltd    Digital Media Division   900 Hitachi way  Chula Vista   CA 91914 3556 USA CANADA  Tel   1  800 225 1741   Fax   1  619 591 5418    gt  http   www hitachi us digitalmedia       Hitachi Europe Ltd   Consumer Affairs  Department   PO Box 3007   Maidenhead   Berkshire SL6 8ZE UNITED KINGDOM   Tel  0870 405 4405   Email  consumer mail hitachi eu com  
166. et on in the projector  the network connection between the  projector and computer may not be established since IP address may be  varied      Even if you use the profile connection  it will be memorized as a history  record        24    1 7 Configuring the network settings manually    All setting for the network connection between  the projector and computer is input manually     Projector Connection    rojector  Slot the manual connection method you wouk ihe to usar                Profie name Oste costed  Profie 1 11 30 2009 3 19 46 PM  Profie 2 11 20 2009 2 19 41 PM       Select the  Configure Network Settings    Manually   New   eat   mee   My Connection       Projector name IP address   Proyector 1 192 168 1 101 11 30 2009 3 23 24 PM  Projector 2 192 168 1102 11 30 2009 3 72 24 PM  Projector 3 192 168 1 103 11 30 2009 3 21 24 PM          The information to be input manually is different  depending on how you want to  connect the projector and computer     Wireless LAN    The projector is required to be connected to an access point by a LAN cable  Go    to    126      Wired LAN  If you use the wired LAN  go to    27      25       1 7 Configuring the network settings manually  continued     Wireless LAN          1  The setting on the access point   1    Enter the following information  PUT E  SSID  WirelessAccessPoint  example  ri  Encryption  WEP64bit  example  moda pasme       Encryption key  2              example   Mode  INFRASTRUCTURE       2  Click the  Next      3  
167. etely on  the indicator will stop blinking and light in steady  green    193    To display the picture  select an input signal according to the section  Selecting an  input signal   0318      Turning off the power    1 Press the STANDBY ON button on the projector or the remote control     The message    Power off   will appear on the screen for about 5 seconds   2 Press the STANDBY ON button again while the message appears      The projector lamp will go off  and the POWER indicator will begin blinking in  orange  Then POWER indicator will stop blinking and light in steady orange  when the lamp cooling is complete    2193     3 Attach the lens cover  after the POWER indicator turns in steady orange                                       wwe     reve     rower                Do not turn the projector on for about 10 minutes or more after turning it off   Turning the projector on again too soon could shorten the lifetime of some  consumable parts of the projector     NOTE     Turn the power on off in right order  Please power on the projector    prior to the connected devices      This projector has the function that can make the projector automatically turn on   off  Please refer to the DIRECT POWER ON    150  and AUTO POWER OFF    151   items of the OPTION menu    e Use the shutdown switch  L94  only when the projector is not turned off by  normal procedure        Operating VOLUME     button    Adjusting the volume    4 Use the VOLUME   VOLUME   buttons to adjust the volume   
168. fault gateway when DHCP is disabled   Configures the name of the projector    The length of the Projector Name can be up to 64 alphanumeric  Projector Name characters  Only alphabets  numbers and following symbols  can be used        amp             lt   gt       _        and space   Particular projector name is pre assigned by default   Configures the location to be referred to when using SNMP     sysLocation  SNMP  The length of the sysLocation can be up to 255 alphanumeric  characters  Only numbers  0 9  and alphabet    a z      A Z  can be used   Configures the contact information to be referred to when  using SNMP    The length of the sysContact can be up to 255 alphanumeric  characters  Only numbers  0 9  and alphabet    a z        A Z    can be used   DNS Server Address Configures the DNS server address     Configures the AMX Device Discovery setting to detect the projector  AMX D D  from the controllers of AMX connected to the same network  For the   AMX Device Discovery    details of AMX Device Discovery  visit the AMX web site     URL  http   www amx com  Click the  Apply  button to save the settings                                   sysContact  SNMP                 NOTE   The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection   When the configuration settings are changed  you must restart the network connection  You can  restart the network connection by clicking the  Network Restart  on the main menu       If you connect the projector
169. figure Network Settings Manual   sma   ce   s      2  The  Create new profile  will come up   If you have already made 10 profile data   you cannot make a new one  until you delete          Profi name          a stored data  Adate name   a bjo Wertes LAN Mri PCI Express Ader  Wireless settings   sop Ss  Input all information required for your wewn 5  je                  s  network connection   i UL ML NN     If you want to clear the information you input  mae  click the  Clear   Pate o            Subnet mask i  Corann ang  P aies d  Siret mak r NN    z     cw      3  Click the  OK   after all information is set   If you don t want to store it  click the  Cancel      4  The new profile data is shown in the profile list  if you click the  OK    NOTE   When you make a new profile data  it is strongly recommended to    check that the new dada can work properly by selecting the data at the Profile  connection     223       If you change a wireless network adapter on your computer  make a new  profile data for the adapter        33    1 9 Profile data  continued     1 9 3 Editing Profile data    If necessary  the profile data can be edited on  the Manual Configuration screen     123     1  Select the  Profile   and select one of the  data listed in the window     2  Click the  Edit      3  The  Edit profile  screen will come up     4  Edit the information required to be revised   If you want to clear all information in the  window  click the  Clear      5  Click the  OK   after the
170. filter cover     3 While supporting the projector with one hand  use    your other hand to pull the filter cover forward in the  direction of the arrow     4 Use a vacuum cleaner for the filter vent of the    projector and the outer side of the filter unit     Take the filters out while holding the filter cover     e    6 Use a vacuum cleaner on both sides of the filters      When vacuuming up the fine meshed filter  hold it  So it will not be sucked in  If the filters are damaged   or heavily soiled  replace them with the new ones     7 Put the filters back into the filter cover     Put the coarse meshed filter into a filter cover  first  Then put the fine meshed filter on the coarse  meshed one  turning its stitched side up        8 Put the filter unit back into the projector     Filter  coarse meshed   Filter  fine meshed     SOS Stitched  Si side    87     continued on next page     Cleaning and replacing the air filter  continued     9 Turn the projector on and reset the filter time using the FILTER TIME item in    the EASY MENU      1  Press the MENU button to display a menu     2  Point at the FILTER TIME using the V A button  then press the  gt  button   A dialog will appear     3  Press the  gt  button to select  OK  on the dialog  It performs resetting the  filter time     NOTE   Please replace the air filter when it is damaged or heavily soiled      When you replace the projection lamp  please replace the air filter  An air filter  of specified type will come toget
171. g  In Red    Blinking  In Red    Turned  off    The lamp cover has not been properly fixed   Please turn the power off  and allow the projector to  cool down at least 45 minutes  After the projector has  sufficiently cooled down  please make confirmation of  the attachment state of the lamp cover  After performing  any needed maintenance  turn the power on again    If the same indication is displayed after the remedy   please contact your dealer or service company        Blinking  In Red  or  Lighting  In Red          Blinking  In Red     Continued on next page        The cooling fan is not operating    Please turn the power off  and allow the projector to  cool down at least 20 minutes  After the projector has  sufficiently cooled down  please make confirmation  that no foreign matter has become caught in the fan   etc   and then turn the power on again    If the same indication is displayed after the remedy   please contact your dealer or service company        93    Regarding the indicator lamps  continued     POWER    indicator Description          There is a possibility that the interior portion  has become heated   Please turn the power off  and allow the projector to cool down at least  In Red 20 minutes  After the projector has sufficiently cooled down  please make  Lighting   confirmation of the following items  and then turn the power on again   Li m In Red     Is there blockage of the air passage aperture   wea   Is the air filter dirty     Does the peripheral temp
172. ge or  shorten the life of this product       f the lamp breaks soon after the first time it is used  it is possible  that there are electrical problems elsewhere besides the lamp  If this  happens  consult your local dealer or a service representative      Handle with care  jolting or scratching could cause the lamp bulb to burst during use     Using the lamp for long periods of time  could cause it dark  not to light  up or to burst  When the pictures appear dark  or when the color tone  is poor  please replace the lamp as soon as possible  Do not use old   used  lamps  this is a cause of breakage                 Cleaning and replacing the air filter    Please check and clean the air filter periodically  When the indicators or a message  prompts you to clean the air filter  comply with it as soon as possible  The air filter has two  kinds of filters inside  Replace the filters when they are damaged or too soiled  To prepare  the new filters  make contact with your dealer and tell the following type number     Type number   MU06481  Filter set  Filter cover  When you replace the lamp  please replace the air filter  An air 2  filter of specified type will come together with a replacement    lamp for this projector   Turn the projector off  and unplug the power cord  Allow the    projector to sufficiently cool down   2 Use a vacuum cleaner on and around the filter cover        ENGLISH B        3 While supporting the projector with one hand  use your    other hand to pull the f
173. haracters  will be erased  The PROJECTOR NAME can be input up to 64  PROJECTOR characters   NAME  3  To change an already inserted  character  press the A V button  to move the cursor to one of the  first 3 lines  and use the  lt   gt   buttons to move the cursor on the  character to be changed  After  pressing the ENTER or INPUT  button  the character is selected   Then  follow the same procedure  as described at the item  2  above      4  To finish entering text  move the cursor to the OK on screen and  press the  gt   ENTER or INPUT button  To revert to the previous  PROJECTOR NAME without saving changes  move the cursor  to the CANCEL on screen and press the  lt   ENTER or INPUT  button               continued on next page     62    Description          Selecting this item displays the MY   IMAGE menu    To store images in the projector  the   application software PJImg Projector   Image Tool that can be downloaded   from our website is required    Use the A    buttons to select an item which is a still image by the  MY IMAGE  GQ My Image Function in the User s manual   Network  Guide  and the  gt  or ENTER button to display the image       The item without image stored cannot be selected     The image names are each displayed in 16 characters or less     MY IMAGE To switch the image displayed    Use the A V buttons     To return to the menu  Press the  lt  button on the remote control     To erase the image displayed and its source file in the projector    1  Press the R
174. he United States of America and other countries and Link    areas   All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners  1    HITACHI Read this Safety Guide first     Inspire the Next    Projector  User s Manual   Safety Guide    Thank you for purchasing this projector        NOTE   The information in this manual is subject to change without notice      The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in  this manual      The reproduction  transmission or use of this document or contents is not  permitted without express written authority     About The Symbols    Various symbols are used in this manual  the user s manual and on the product  itself to ensure correct usage  to prevent danger to the user and others  and to  prevent property damage  The meanings of these symbols are described below   It is important that you read these descriptions thoroughly and fully understand  the contents        This symbol indicates information that  if ignored  could    A WARNING possibly result in personal injury or even death due to  incorrect handling     This symbol indicates information that  if ignored  could    A CAUTION result possibly in personal injury or physical damage  due to incorrect handling                 Typical Symbols    This symbol indicates an additional warning  including cautions   An  illustration is provided to clarify the contents     This symbol indicates a prohibited action  The contents will be clearly  G indicated in a
175. he like   internal temperatures rise and could cause a fire  a burn or malfunction to the projector     NOTE   Please reset the filter time only when you have cleaned or replaced  the air filter  for a suitable indication about the air filter       The projector may display the message such as    CHECK THE AIR FLOW  or  turn off the projector  to prevent the internal heat level rising        Replacing the internal clock battery    This projector has internal clock that uses a battery  When the clock of the network  function does not work correctly  please try solution by replacement of the battery     HITACHI MAXELL  part number CR2032 or CR2032H     1 Turn the projector off  and unplug the    power cord  Allow the projector to cool  sufficiently   2 After making sure that the projector has    cooled adequately  slowly turn over the  projector  so that the bottom is facing   3 Turn the battery cover fully in the direction    indicated  OPEN  using a coin or the like   and pick the cover up to remove it   4 Pry up the battery using a flathead   screwdriver or the like to take it out  While  prying it up  put a finger lightly on the  battery since it may pop out of the holder   5 Replace the battery with a new HITACHI    MAXELL  Part No  CR2032 or CR2032H   Slide the battery in under the plastic claw   and push it into the holder until it clicks   6 Replace the battery cover in place  then   turn it in the direction indicated    CLOSE     using such as coins  to fix     Battery
176. her with a replacement lamp for this projector     Please reset the filter time only when you have cleaned or replaced the air  filter  for a suitable indication about the air filter      The projector may display the message such as  CHECK THE AIR FLOW  or  turn off the projector  to prevent the internal heat level rising        88    Replacing the internal clock battery    This projector has internal clock that uses a battery  When the clock of the network  function does not work correctly  please try solution by replacement of the battery     HITACHI MAXELL  part number CR2032 or CR2032H     Battery cover    1 Turn the projector off  and unplug the    power cord  Allow the projector to cool  sufficiently     After making sure that the projector has    cooled adequately  slowly turn over the  projector  so that the bottom is facing     3 Turn the battery cover fully in the direction    indicated  OPEN  using a coin or the like   and pick the cover up to remove it     Pry up the battery using a flathead   screwdriver or the like to take it out  While  prying it up  put a finger lightly on the  battery since it may pop out of the holder   D   Replace the battery with a new HITACHI    MAXELL  Part No  CR2032 or CR2032H   Slide the battery in under the plastic claw   and push it into the holder until it clicks     6 Replace the battery cover in place  then   turn it in the direction indicated    CLOSE     using such as coins  to fix           AWARNING    Be careful of handling 
177. ignal  from the HDMI port  It can be selected only for the picture input from  the HDMI port     Even if the projector is in the standby mode  cooling fans may  work and make noises when the built in speaker is in operation   e C C   Closed Caption  is automatically activated when X is selected  and an input signal containing C C  is received  This function is  available only when the signal is NTSC for VIDEO or S VIDEO  or  480i 60 for COMPONENT  COMPUTER IN1 or COMPUTER IN2   and when AUTO is selected for DISPLAY in the C C  menu under the  SCREEN menu    49      AUDIO SOURCE        continued on next page     42    Item    Description          HDMI AUDIO    MIC LEVEL    MIC VOLUME    Using the A    buttons switches the mode for the HDMI audio   Check each of the two modes provided and select the suitable one    for your HDMI audio device   182    Using the A V buttons switches the input level to match that of the    microphone connected to the MIC port   HIGH  amp  LOW    HIGH  for a microphone with an amplifier   LOW  for a microphone without an amplifier     Using the  lt   gt  buttons adjusts the volume of the microphone  connected to the MIC port   Low       High       43    SCREEN MANU    From the SCREEN menu  items shown in the table  below can be performed    Select an item using the A V cursor buttons  and  press the  gt  cursor button or ENTER button to  execute the item  Then perform it according to the    following table        Description          LANGUAGE    ME
178. ill be ready on your computer for the USB  Display  The application   LiveViewer Lite for USB   will be automatically closed  when the USB cable is unplugged     NOTE   If the software does not start automatically  this is typically because  CD ROM autorun is disabled on your OS   follow the instructions below     1  Click on the  Start  button on the toolbar and select the    Run       2  Enter FLiveViewerLiteUSB exe and then press the  OK     If your CD ROM drive is not drive F on your computer  you will need to    replace F with the correct drive letter assigned to your CD ROM drive       Please check and get the latest version at Hitachi Web site   http   hitachi us digitalmedia or http   www hitachidigitalmedia com  Follow the instructions that can be obtained at the site for updating        This application will appear in the Windows  notification area once it starts  You can quit the  application from your computer by selecting     Quit    on the menu     NOTE     The    LiveViewer     refer to the  User s Manual   Network Guide  and 7  this application cannot be used at the D Cannot start LiveViewer Lite for USB while Live Viewer is running   same time  If you connect your computer pm   to the projector by using a USB cable       LiveViewer Lite for USB    while the  LiveViewer   is running  the following message will be displayed     If any application software having the firewall function is installed into your  computer  make the firwall function invalid with follo
179. ilter cover forward in the direction of  the arrow    4 Use a vacuum cleaner for the filter vent of the projector    and the outer side of the filter unit    5 Take the filters out while holding the filter cover        Use a vacuum cleaner on both sides of the filters  When  vacuuming up the fine meshed filter  hold it so it will not  be sucked in  If the filters are damaged or heavily soiled   replace them with the new ones   Put the filters back into the filter cover  Put the coarse  meshed filter into a filter cover first  Then put the fine  meshed filter on the coarse meshed one  turning its stitched  side up   8 Put the filter unit back into the projector        9 Turn the projector on and reset the filter time using the      FILTER TIME item in the EASY MENU   Filter  coarse meshed    1  Press the MENU button to display a menu  Filter  fine meshed    2  Point at the FILTER TIME using the V A button  then se Stitched  press the    gt  button  A dialog will appear    3  Press the  gt  button to select    OK    on the dialog  It  performs resetting the filter time     AWARNING P Before taking care of the air filter  make sure the power cable  is not plugged in  then allow the projector to cool sufficiently     gt  Use only the air filter of the specified type  Do not use the projector without the  air filter or the filter cover  It could result in a fire or malfunction to the projector    gt  Clean the air filter periodically  If the air filter becomes clogged by dust or t
180. information is confirmed         continued on next page     69    Description          If this function is set to ON when the vertical angle of   the projector or MIRROR setting at which the projector   is turned on is different than the previously recorded  the   TRANSITION DETECTOR ON alarm will be displayed   and the projector will not display the input signal      To display the signal again  set this function OFF      After about 5 minutes of displaying the TRANSITION DETECTOR ON  alarm  the lamp will turn off      Keystone adjustment feature has been prohibited as long as the Transition  Detector function is on     1 Turning on the TRANSITION DETECTOR  1 1 Use the A Y buttons on the SECURITY menu  to select TRANSITION DETECTOR and press  the    or the ENTER button to display the  TRANSITION DETECTOR on off menu   1 2 Use the A Y buttons on the TRANSITION  DETECTOR on off menu to select ON  Select  ON and the current angle and MIRROR  setting will be recorded  The ENTER NEW    PASSWORD box  small  will be displayed  ENTER NEW PASSWORD  1 3 Use the A   V  lt  P buttons to enter a box  small   password  Move the cursor to the right side  of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box  small   and press the P   button to display the NEW  PASSWORD AGAIN box  enter the same  TRANSITION password again   1 4 Move the cursor to the right side of the  DETECTOR NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and press  the    button to display the NOTE NEW  PASSWORD box for about 30 seconds   please make note of the passw
181. ing  The indication of    FREEZE    and  II  while freezing the screen by  pressing the FREEZE button   The indication of the TEMPLATE displayed by changing     When the OFF is selected  please remember if the picture is  frozen  Do not mistake freezing for a malfunction  925          continued on next page     46    Description          SOURCE NAME    Each input port for this projector can have a name applied to it    1  Use the A  buttons on the SCREEN menu to select SOURCE  NAME and press the  gt  or ENTER button   The SOURCE NAME menu will be displayed    2  Use the A    buttons on the SOURCE a  NAME menu to select the port to be  named and press the    button  The  SOURCE NAME dialog will be displayed   Right side of the menu is blank until a  name is specified      3  Select an icon you d like to assign to the  port in the SOURCE NAME dialog  The  name assigned to the port will also be  automatically switched according to your  icon selection  Press the    or ENTER  button to determine your icon selection      4  Select a number you d like to assign to  the port along with the icon  You can  select the number either from blank   no number assigned   1  2  3  or 4      5  If you d like to modify the name assigned  to the port  select CUSTOM NAME and  press the    button         continued on next page     47    Description           6  The current name will be displayed on  the first line  Use the A V 4    buttons  and the ENTER or INPUT button to  select and enter charac
182. input signal will   be selected automatically  This function is available only when   the AUTO is selected for the VIDEO FORMAT item in the INPUT  menu    137   The vertical position and horizontal position will be  automatically set to the default    For a component video signal   The vertical position and horizontal position will be automatically  set to the default  The horizontal phase will be automatically  adjusted       The automatic adjustment operation requires approx  10 seconds   Also please note that it may not function correctly with some input     When this function is performed for a video signal  a certain extra  such as a line may appear outside a picture      When this function is performed for a computer signal  a black  frame may be displayed on the edge of the screen  depending on  the PC model      The items adjusted by this function may vary when the FINE or  DISABLE is selected for the AUTO ADJUST item of the SERVICE  item in the OPTION menu  E155         35    NEAR TOYS TRU     From the INPUT menu  items shown in the table  below can be performed    Select an item using the A V cursor buttons  and  press the  gt  cursor button or ENTER button to  execute the item  Then perform it according to the    following table        Description          PROGRESSIVE    VIDEO NR    COLOR SPACE    COMPONENT    Using the A V buttons switches the progress mode     TV   FILM    OFF  LF      This function works only for a video signal  s video signal  component  video 
183. installing the projector  consult your dealer  about your installation                 4 3 screen 16 9 screen   Screen size Pro KOJ TERME   diagonal  ojection distance Projection distance   min  max  min  max   type           l       inch   m m  inch   m   inch  cm   inch   cm   inch   m  inch   m J inch   cm   inch   cm   inch  30   0 8    0 9   34   1 0   41   41 16 5 2 1 0   38   1 1   45   39   15    1 0  40  10 12 4e  14 s5  55  27  6   2   13 51   15  60   8   2  2       13 15  58   18  69   69   27   8   3   16    60   1 5    1 8   70   2 1   83   82  32   9   4   19  1 8   2 1 97 4  23 90   2 7   106  90   35    3    1      80   2 0   24 5    2 6    90   2 3    2 7 126 5    2 9  2 5   3 0 6  33  120   3 0   3 6   142   4 3   168 7  39  3 8   4 5 9    4 9   194  5 8   229  193  76    6    2    5 1   6 0   237   7 1   281 12   6 6   259   7 8   306   257 101   8    3    6 4   7 5 352 15   82  300   7 6    9 1   357   10 7  422   411   162   46   18   9 9   389   11 7   460   386   152    12    5                         AWARNING P Install the projector in a stable horizontal position     gt  Place the projector in a cool place  and ensure that there is sufficient ventilation    gt  Do not place the projector anyplace where it may get wet     gt  Use only the mounting accessories the manufacturer specified  and leave installing  and removing the projector with the mounting accessories to the service personnel     gt  Read and keep the user s manual of the mounting accesso
184. invalid      When switching from the Multi PC mode to the Single PC mode  the Presenter  mode setting of the computer is valid      The Presenter Mode is set valid in factory default setting        n addition to using the software menu on the computer on which Presenter  Mode is turned on  you can cancel this function by using the projector s OSD  menu QUIT PRESENTER MODE EXECUTE of the PRESENTATION item in  the NETWORK menu         5 Display User Name  A    User Name    that is up to 20 letters can be input by using alphanumeric  characters   The user name can be displayed on the projector screen  so you can find out  whose image is currently on the screen    Refer to LINETWORK menu in the User s Manual     Operating Guide   If the check box is not marked  the information is not sent to the projector     42    2 2 Starting the Network Presentation    This chapter explains the Network Presentation feature with which you can project  computer images transmitted through a network    The  LiveViewer  allows you to project images from one or multiple computers by  connecting the projector to an existing network without using computer cables   This Network Presentation feature helps you to smoothly make your presentations  and conduct conferences    To start the Network Presentation  select the LAN port as the input source on the  projector and click the Starting Capture button on the  LiveViewer      2 2 1 Display mode    Two display modes  Single PC mode and Multi PC mode  are a
185. ion may  not work well    e This function will be unavailable when Transition Detector is on    370      23    Using the magnify feature    1     Press the MAGNIFY ON button on the remote control  MAGNIFY  The picture will be magnified  and the MAGNIFY dialog will ON OFF button  appear on the screen  When the MAGNIFY ON button is  pressed for the first time after the projector is turned on  the  picture will be zoomed by 1 5 times  On the dialog  triangle  marks to show each direction will be displayed        While the triangles are displayed on the dialog  use the    EE wo     ME  oN NN      A     lt 4 P cursor buttons to shift the magnifying area     A magnifying glass icon will be displayed on the dialog when the MAGNIFY      ON button is pressed while the dialog with the triangles is displayed     While the magnifying glass icon is displayed on the dialog  use the A    cursor      buttons to adjust the magnification ratio  The magnification ratio will be adjusted    24    with fine steps  And changes in the ratio in single steps are subtle so they may  be hard to recognize     Press the MAGNIFY OFF button on the remote control to exit magnification     The MAGNIFY dialog will automatically disappear in several seconds with no  operation  The dialog will appear again if the MAGNIFY ON button is pressed  when the dialog has automatically disappeared    While the MAGNIFY dialog is displayed  press the MAGNIFY ON button to  switch the dialog between magnifying area shifting  
186. ired after the SNMP Port configuration    settings have been changed  Click the  Network Restart  and configure the  following items        6  Click the  Security Settings  on the main menu   7  Click the  SNMP  and set the community name on the screen that is displayed     NOTE   A Network Restart is required after the Community name has been  changed  Click the  Network Restart  and configure the following items    8  Configure the settings for Trap transmission of Failures Warnings  Click the   Alert Settings  on the main menu and select the Failure Warning item to be  configured    9  Click the  Enable  check box to send out the SNMP trap for Failures Warnings     Clear the  Enable  check box when SNMP trap transmission is not required   10  Click the  Apply  button to save the settings     80    7 3 Event Scheduling    The scheduling function enables to setup scheduled events including power on    power off  It enables to be    self management    projector     NOTE     You can schedule the following control events  Power  Input Source   My Image  Messenger  Slideshow     156      The power on   off event has the lowest priority among the all events that are  defined at the same time      There are 3 types of Scheduling  1  daily 2  weekly 3  specific date   455      The priority for scheduled events is as follows 1  specific date 2  weekly 3   daily      Up to five specific dates are available for scheduled events  Priority is given to  those with the lower numbers when 
187. is blank        12    Command control settings   TCP  23   1  Command format  Same as RS 232C communication  refer to RS 232C Communicaton command format     2  Response code   Error code   h  shows hexadecimal   Four of the response   error code used for TCP 23 are the same as RS 232C  Communication  1   4   One authentication error reply  5  is added     1  ACK reply   06h   Refer to RS 232C communication    410     2  NAK reoly   15h  Refer to RS 232C communication    10     3  Error reply   1Ch   0000h  Refer to RS 232C communication  10     4  Data reply   1Dh   xxxxh  Refer to RS 232C communication    910     5  Authentication error reply   1Fh   0400h  When authentication error occurred  the projector returns the error code      TCP  9715   1  Command format    The commands some datum are added to the head and the end of the ones of  TCP 9715 are used     Header Data length   RS 232C command   Check sum Connection ID  0x02 0x0D 13 bytes 1 byte 1 byte   Header   02  Fixed   Data Length   RS 232C commands byte length  0xOD  Fixed    RS 232C commands   Refer to RS 232C Communication command format    410     Check Sum     This is the value to make zero on the addition of the lower 8 bits from the header  to the checksum      Connection ID   Random value from 0 to 255  This value is attached to the reply data         NOTE   Operation cannot be guaranteed when the projector receives an  undefined command or data     Provide an interval of at least 40ms between the response 
188. is disabled  Please execute the AUTO  KEYSTONE  EXECUTE  in the SETUP menu for automatic  keystone distortion correction      When the projector is suspended from the ceiling this feature will  not function properly so select the OFF     This function will be unavailable when the Transition Detector is on     E170      Using the A    buttons turns on off the DIRECT POWER ON  function     ON  amp  OFF    When set to the ON  the lamp in projector will be automatically turned  on without the usual procedure    417   only when the projector is  supplied with the power after the power was cut while the lamp was on     This function does not work as long as the power has been  supplied to the projector while the lamp is off      After turning the lamp on by the DIRECT POWER ON function    if neither input nor operation is detected for about 30 minutes  the  projector is turned off  even though the AUTO POWER OFF function   EL151  is disabled         continued on next page     50    Description          Using the A    buttons adjusts the time to count down to  automatically turn the projector off     Long  max  99 minutes          Short  min  0 minute   DISABLE     AUTO POWER   When the time is set to 0  the projector is not turned off automatically    OFF When the time is set to 1 to 99  and when the passed time with no   signal or an unsuitable signal reaches at the set time  the projector  lamp will be turned off   If one of the projector s buttons or the remote control buttons  
189. is inclined to near  30 degree or over  this  function may not work well      This function will be unavailable when the Transition Detector is on       170      Using the  lt  P gt  buttons corrects the vertical keystone distortion     Shrink the bottom of the image    Shrink the top of the image      The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs  For  some input  this function may not work well      When the zoom adjustment is set to the TELE  telephoto focus    this function may be excessive  This function should be used when  the zoom adjustment is set to the full WIDE  wide angle focus   whenever possible      This function will be unavailable when the Transition Detector is on       070    Using the A    buttons turns on off the AUTO ECO MODE   ON  amp  OFF      When ON is selected  the projector will always be set to Eco mode  at start up regardless of the ECO MODE  0441  setting  An OSD  message  AUTO ECO MODE    will be displayed for tens of seconds  when the projector starts with this function activated         continued on next page     40    Description          ECO MODE    MIRROR    STANDBY MODE    MONITOR OUT    Using the A V buttons turns off on the Eco mode    NORMAL  amp  ECO    When the ECO is selected  acoustic noise and screen brightness  are reduced   e When AUTO ECO MODE   140  is set to ON  the projector will  always be set to Eco mode at start up regardless this setting     Using the A    buttons switches the mode for mirror status      
190. is pressed or one of the commands  except get commands  is  transmitted to the CONTROL port during the corresponding time   projector will not be turned off   Please refer to the section    Turning off the power   1817      Using the A V buttons selects the function of USB TYPE B port   To use this function  you need to connect the USB TYPE B port of  the projector and the type A USB port of a computer     MOUSE    USB DISPLAY    MOUSE   The accessory remote control works as the simple mouse   and keyboard of the computer    USB DISPLAY   The port works as an input port that receives image   signals from the computer    182       It may take several seconds to project the images from the USB   USB TYPEB   TYPE B port      In the following cases  a message to notify you that USB TYPE B   port is not available for picture input appears together with the USB   TYPE B dialog      This setting is switched to MOUSE while a picture input from the  USB TYPE B port is projected      The USB TYPE B port is selected as the picture input source while  this setting is set to MOUSE  Select USB DISPLAY in the dialog to  project the picture input to the USB TYPE B port  In this case  you  cannot use the simple mouse and keyboard function  Otherwise  select other port for picture input         continued on next page     51    Description          LAMP TIME    FILTER TIME       The lamp time is the usage time of the lamp  counted after the last  resetting  It is shown in the OPTION menu    Pre
191. isplayed again  To display this dialog again  click Option   icon in the   LiveViewer  main menu and remove the check mark in the box  Not displaying  confirmation dialog for adding Network settings      If you want to change the Network  configuration to add  click the  Change   A  dialog for changing the Network configuration  as shown to the right will be displayed  Enter  IP address and subnet mask   then click the   OK   Procedure to connect to the projector  will start    Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the  connection to your destination     130    If you click the  Cancel   you will return to the  dialog for adding a Network configuration           If the entered IP address and projector s IP AO AA AA  address are the same  a warning dialog shown Pas chooes a P Aces at caer no n uas    to the right will be displayed    Click the  OK   and then enter a different IP  address from the projector s one in the dialog  for changing Network configuration     If the connection is not available with the  entered Network configuration  a warning  dialog shown to the right will be displayed   Click the  OK  to return to the dialog for  changing the Network configuration  and then  enter appropriate configuration     NOTE   If a Network configuration to connect to the projector has been added  on the computer  the added Network configuration will be erased once the    application software is closed        1 5 Selecting the network connection method  continued     E Are you sure you
192. ith hard objects     Take care of the cabinet and the remote control    Incorrect care could have adverse influence such as discoloration  peeling paint  etc      Use a soft cloth to clean the cabinet and control panel of the projector and the remote  control  When excessively soiled dilute a neutral detergent in water  wet and wring out the  soft cloth and afterward wipe with a dry soft cloth  Do not use undiluted detergent directly      Do not use an aerosol sprays  solvents  volatile substances or abrasive cleaner      Before using chemical wipes  be sure to read and observe the instructions      Do not allow long term close contact with rubber or vinyl     About bright spots or dark spots   Although bright spots or dark spots may appear on the screen  this is a unique characteristic of  liquid crystal displays  and such do not constitute or imply a machine defect     Be careful of printing of the LCD panel   If the projector continues projecting a still image  inactive images or 16 9 aspect images in  case of 4 3 panel  etc   for long time  the LCD panel might possibly be printed     NOTE    About consumables    Lamp  LCD panels  polarizors and other optical components  and air filter and cooling fans   have a different lifetime in each  These parts may need to be replaced after a long usage   time      This product isn t designed for continuous use of long time  In the case of continuous use   for 6 hours or more  or use for 6 hours or more every day  even if it isn t co
193. iveViewer by  adding it to the Exceptions list  box  the  LiveViewer  will never be blocked  by Windows firewall     Proceed to item 1 5 Selecting the network connection method     114     NOTE   If you click the  Yes   the network access by the    LiveViewer       is  temporally permitted by Windows firewall  until the    LiveViewer    is closed       If any application software having the firewall function is installed into you  computer  make the firewall function invalid with following the user s manual        1 4 Selecting the network connection mode  continued     1 4 2 Selecting My Connection        Select the  My Connection  and click the   Connect      Select the Network Connection that you wold like to use   F Wirelect LAN   Wired Lan                If you select the My Connection  the computer  is connected to the projector through the  network by using the profile data that is pre   assigned to My Connection   135   When you select the My Connection  the  cmt   e      computer immediately starts the connection to  the projector     Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination     130     NOTE   If the DHCP is set on in the projector  the network connection  between the projector and computer may not be established since IP address  may be varied  If you like to use the My Connection  set the DHCP off in the    projector      f no profile data is assigned to the My Connection  it can t be used         Troubleshooting   W A network connection co
194. ject to change without notice    The manufacturer  assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual    The reproduction  transfer  or copy of all or any part of this document is not permitted without express written consent     REMARQUE    Les informations contenues dans ce manuel peuvent faire l objet dechangements sans  avertissement pr  alable    Le fabricant ne prend aucune responsabilit   pour les erreurs qui pourraient  se trouver dans ce manuel    La reproduction  la transmission ou l utilisation de ce document ou de  Son contenu est interdite sauf autorisation sp  ciale   crite     HINWEIS   Die Informationen in diesem Handbuch k  nnen ohne vorherige Ank  ndigung ge  ndert  werden    Der Hersteller   bernimmt keine Verantwortung f  r etwaige in diesem Handbuch enthaltene  Fehler    Die Vervielf  ltigung    bertragung oder Verwendung dieses Dokuments oder dessen Inhalts  ist ohne ausdr  ckliche schriftliche Genehmigung nicht gestattet     NOTA    La informaci  n de este manual puede sufrir modificaciones sin previo aviso    El fabricante  no asume ninguna responsabilidad por los errores que puedan aparecer en este manual    No  est   permitida la reproducci  n  transmisi  n o utilizaci  n de este documento ni de su contenido sin  autorizaci  n expresa por escrito     NOTA    Le informazioni riportate in questo manuale sono soggette a modifica senza preavviso    Il  produttore declina qualsiasi responsabilit   per eventuali errori che potrebbero c
195. jector  INPUT button    Each time you press the button  the projector switches its    input port from the current port as below     m gt  COMPUTER IN1  gt  COMPUTER IN2  gt  LAN  x     VIDEO USB TYPEA  x V  S VIDEO USB TYPE B    7 COMPONENT  Y  Cb Pb  Cr Pr      HDMI    e While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION menu  1150   the  projector will keep checking the ports in above order repeatedly till an input  signal is detected    e  t may take several seconds to project the images from the USB TYPE B port      continued on next page   18       Selecting an input signal  continued     1 Sia sse qiiia En A o R     COMPUTER button    Each time you press the button  the projector switches its  input port mom the current port as below  Am  COMPUTER IN1  gt  COMPUTER IN2  gt  LAN 8660  USBTYPEB     USBTYPEA see  e While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION O  OO  menu  the projector will keep checking every port sequentially OO OO  till an input signal is detected    450   If COMPUTER button is                          pressed when VIDEO  S VIDEO  COMPONENT or HDMI port          is selected  the projector will check COMPUTER IN1 port first     e  t may take several seconds to project the images from the  USB TYPE B port     1 Press VIDEO button on the remote control  VIDEO button     Each time you press the button  the projector switches its  input port from the current port as below        C O      HDMI  gt  COMPONENT  Y  Cb Pb  Cr Pr   gt  S VIDEO 6000   VIDEO
196. lay in Full Screen mode   select an image in the Thumbnail screen  Then press the ENTER button on the  remote control or the INPUT button on the keypad  or click  ENTER  on the Web  Remote Control     Full screen display       The following functions can be supported in the Full Screen mode     Button operation       The keypad Web Remote  on the in web browser  projector software     The remote Functions    control          v      or  PAGE DOWN    A  4  or  PAGE UP    ENTER ENTER Displays Thumbnail     v DOWN  RIGHT  or or Shows the next picture      PAGE DOWN       A UP  LEFT  or or Shows the previous picture   4 PAGE UP                   NOTE   These operations are not accessible while the projector OSD is displayed      t is not possible to change the input port by using the INPUT button when the  Thumbnail screen  Slideshow  or Full Screen is displayed        78    PC LESS Presentation  continued   Slideshow mode    The Slideshow mode displays images in full screen and switches the images at  intervals set in INTERVAL on the Thumbnail screen menu  74      Tes  os       You can start this function from the Slideshow menu  To display the Slideshow  menu  select the SLIDESHOW button in the Thumbnail mode and press the  ENTER button on the remote control or INPUT button on the projector     The following operations can be accessible while the Slideshow is displayed     Button operation    The keypad Web Remote  on the in web browser  projector software     ENTER INPUT ENTER 
197. le   Sunday Configures the Sunday schedule   Monday Configures the Monday schedule   Tuesday Configures the Tuesday schedule   Wednesday Configures the Wednesday schedule   Thursday Configures the Thursday schedule   Friday Configures the Friday schedule   Saturday Configures the Saturday schedule   Specific date No 1 Configures the specific date  No 1  schedule   Specific date No 2 Configures the specific date  No 2  schedule   Specific date No 3 Configures the specific date  No 3  schedule                                            Specific date No 4 Configures the specific date  No 4  schedule              Specific date No 5 Configures the specific date  No 5  schedule     55    3 7 Schedule Settings  Continued     The schedule settings are shown below     Item Description  Schedule Click the  Enable  check box to enable the schedule     Configures the month and date   Date  Month Day  This item appears only when Specific date  No  1 5  is  selected                    Click the  Apply  button to save the settings     The current event settings are displayed on the schedule list  To add additional  functions and events  set the following items     Item Description          Time Configures the time to execute commands     Command   Parameter     Power Configures the parameters for power control        Configures the commands to be executed           Input Source Configures the parameters for input switching        My Image Configures the parameters for My Image data display 
198. least 1  Power ON  schedule is saved     When the schedule function is used  the power cord must be connected to the    projector and the outlet  The schedule function does not work when the breaker  in a room is tripped  The power indicator will lights orange or green when the  projector is receiving AC power        82    7 3 Event Scheduling Continued   Date Time Settings    158   The Date Time setting can be adjusted via a web browser     Example  If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10    1  Enter  http   192 168 1 10   into the address bar of the web browser    2  Enter your user name and password  and then click the  OK     3  Click the  Date Time Settings  on the main menu and configure each item   Refer to item 3 8 Date Time Settings  R458  for further information    4  Click the  Apply  button to save the settings     NOTE   The battery for the built in clock may be dead if the clock loses time  even when the date and time have been set correctly  Replace the battery by  following the instructions on replacing the battery     Ec Replacing the internal clock battery in the User s Manual  concise      The internal clock s time may not remain accurate  Using SNTP is  recommended to maintain accurate time        83    7 4 Command Control via the Network    You can configure and control the projector via the network using RS 232C  commands     Communication Port  The following two ports are assigned for the command control     TCP  23  Network Control Po
199. lies with Canadian ICES 003     In the US  and other places where the FCC regulations are applicable  Declaration of Conformity  Trade name HITACHI  Model Number CP X2011N  CP X2511N  CP X3011N  CP X4011N  Responsible Party Hitachi America  Ltd   Address 900 Hitachi way  Chula Vista  CA 91914 3556 U S A   Telephone Number  1  800 225 1741    This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules  Operation is subject   to the following two conditions   1  This device may not cause harmful  interference  and  2  this device must accept any interference received   including interference that may cause undesired operation  This equipment has  been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device   pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules     These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful   interference in a residential installation  This equipment generates  uses  and can   radiate radio frequency energy and  if not installed and used in accordance with the   instructions  may cause harmful interference to radio communications  However    there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation  If this   equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception  which   can be determined by turning the equipment off and on  the user is encouraged to   try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures      Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna      Increase the sepa
200. lowing      When a USB cable connects this projector with a computer having a built in  pointing device  e g  track ball  like a laptop PC  open BIOS setup menu  then  select the external mouse and disable the built in pointing device  because the  built in pointing device may have priority to this function      Windows 95 OSR 2 1 or higher is required for this function  And also this function may  not work depending on the computer   s configurations and mouse drivers  This function  can work with the computer which can operate general USB mouse or keyboard      You cannot do things like press two buttons at once  for instance  pressing  two buttons at the same time to move the mouse pointer diagonally       This function is activated only when the projector is working properly  This function  is not available while the lamp is warming up  the POWER indicator blinks green    and while adjusting the volume and display  correcting for keystone  zooming in on  the screen  using the BLANK function  or displaying the menu screen        Turning on the power STANDBY ON button    POWER indicator  1 Make sure that the power cord is firmly and Fhua             correctly connected to the projector and the  outlet     2 Make sure that the POWER indicator is    steady orange  193   Then remove the lens  cover   3 Press STANDBY ON button on the    projector or the remote control   The projection lamp will light up and POWER  indicator will begin blinking in green  When the  power is compl
201. lug the power cord from the outlet  and make sure to request a  replacement lamp from your local dealer  Note that shards of glass  could damage the projector s internals  or cause injury during handling   so please do not try to clean the projector or replace the lamp yourself   Disconnect   If the lamp should break  it will make a loud bang when it does    the plug ventilate the room well  and make sure not to inhale the gas or fine  from the particles that come out from the projector s vent holes  and not to get   ew them into your eyes or mouth     Before replacing the lamp  turn the projector off and unplug the power  cord  then wait at least 45 minutes for the lamp to cool sufficiently   Handling the lamp while hot can cause burns  as well as damaging the lamp       Never unscrew except the appointed  marked by an arrow  screws      Do not open the lamp cover while the projector is suspended from   a ceiling  This is dangerous  since if the lamp s bulb has broken  the  Q shards will fall out when the cover is opened  In addition  working in       high places is dangerous  so ask your local dealer to have the lamp  replaced even if the bulb is not broken     Do not use the projector with the lamp cover removed  At the lamp  replacing  make sure that the screws are screwed in firmly  Loose  Screws could result in damage or injury       Use only the lamp of the specified type  Use of a lamp that does not  meet the lamp specifications for this model could cause a fire  dama
202. lution    Front porch  D   I      Active video  C       Horizontal signal timing  us     Back porch  b     Data  V  Sync     Sync  a     Vertical signal timing  lines     Front porch  d   l    Active video  c  i        Hx V   A      C     D      B      a     b     9     d     Signal mode          720 x 400    2 0  640 x 480 3 8    640 x 480 1 3   4 1   20 3    640 x 480 2 0    1 9   25 4     ele    3 8   20 3   0 5    640 x 480    1  800 x 600 2 22 2    3        2 oi2      o   o    800 x 600 2 1 3   16 0      6   22  17   0   36  22      4   32    800 x 600 1 6    800 x 600 1 1 2    142  9    832 x 624 1 1    16 2   0 3    3  14 5    o  P    1024 x 768 2 1 2 5   15 8       1024 x 768 1 8    9  1024 x 768 1 2   22 1  1024 x 768 1 0   2 2   10       1152 x 864 1 2    1280 x 768 1 7    1280 x 800 1 6  1280 x 960 1 0    1  13 7   0 3        99   eo    2 4  2 5  2 4    10 7  16 0  15 3    2 9   11 9    1280x1024   1 0   2 11 9      1280 x 1024   1 1    1280x1024   1 0   1 4   8 1  1400x1050   1 2   20   11 4    1 9   9 9    1600 x 1200   12       3 i  1 8   9 5       o lo lelee olo  NJ A  Oo  O1 h5    04    33   480    Co  PES  o    WIM   N A  co N  A A  co e     e    Olo      A  Co  o    Co  N  c1  AB  co  o    23   600    N  Co         N  N  N  o  co  eo  pec pe eere    TEXT  1    600   37   SVGA  72Hz     Co  N   x    600     99     SVGA  75Hz     27   600 SVGA  85Hz     624  768    Co  wo  o    o  N  e    Oo  N         D        864  768  800    ji    960    1024  1024  1024  1
203. may not function correctly with some input    e When this function is performed for a video signal  a certain extra such as a line  may appear outside a picture    e When this function is performed for a computer signal  a black frame may be  displayed on the edge of the screen  depending on the PC model    e The items adjusted by this function may vary when the FINE or DISABLE is selected  for the AUTO ADJUST item of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu  E1155      AUTO button       Adjusting the position    1 Press POSITION button on the remote control when no menu is    indicated   The    POSITION     indication will appear on the screen     2 Use the A     lt   gt  cursor buttons to adjust the picture position      When you want to reset the operation  press RESET button on  the remote control during the operation    To complete this operation  press POSITION button again  Even if  you do not do anything  the dialog will automatically disappear  after a few seconds  POSITION button   e When this function is performed on a video signal or an s video signal  some image  such as an extra line may appear at outside of the picture    e When this function is performed on a video signal or s video signal  the range of  this adjustment depends on OVER SCAN in IMAGE menu  1133  setting  It is not  possible to adjust when OVER SCAN is set to 10    e If POSITION button is pressed when a menu is indicated on screen  the displayed  picture does not move its position but the menu does  
204. more than one event has been scheduled  for the same date and time  e g    Specific date No  1  has priority over  Specific  date No  2  and so on      Be sure to set the date and time before enabling scheduled events     158        81    7 3 Event Scheduling Continued   Schedule Settings    155   Schedule settings can be configured from a web browser     Example  If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10    1  Enter  http   192 168 1 10   into the address bar of the web browser    2  Enter your user name and password  and then click the  OK     3  Click the  Schedule Settings  on the main menu and select the required  schedule item  For example  if you want to perform the command every  Sunday  please select the  Sunday       Click the  Enable  check box to enable scheduling      Enter the date  month day  for specific date scheduling      Click the  Apply  button to save the settings      After configure the time  command and parameters  click the  Register  to add  the new event    8  Click the  Delete  button when you want to delete a schedule     4  5  6  7    There are three types of scheduling    1  Daily  Perform the specified operation at a specified time every day    2  Sunday   Saturday  Perform the specified operation at the specified time on a  specified day of the week    3  Specific date  Perform the specified operation on the specified date and time     NOTE   In standby mode  the POWER indicator will flash green for approx  3  seconds when at 
205. mum length in a line on the  playlist txt  file is 255 characters  including linefeed  If any line exceeds the limit  the  playlist txt  file becomes invalid     Up to 999 files can be registered to the Playlist  However  if some folders exist in  the same directory the limit number is decreased by the number of folders     Any files over the limit will not be shown in the Slideshow      If the storage device is protected or does not have sufficient space  the  playlist txt   file cannot be created    e For the Slideshow settings  refer to the section    Slideshow mode       79         81    USB Display    The projector can display images transferred from a computer via an USB cable  410      Hardware and software requirement for computer     OS  One of the following    Windows   XP Home Edition  Professional Edition  32 bit version only    Windows Vista    Home Basic  Home Premium  Business  Ultimate  Enterprise   32 bit version only      CPU  Pentium 4  2 8 GHz or higher      Graphic card  16 bit  XGA or higher     Memory  512 MB or higher     Hard disk space  30 MB or higher     USB Port     USB cable   1 piece    Select the USB DISPLAY for the USB TYPE B item in the OPTION menu  When you  connect your computer to the USB TYPE B port on the projector using a USB cable   the projector will be recognized as a CD ROM drive on your computer  Then  the  software in the projector   LiveViewerLiteUSB exe    will run automatically and the  application   LiveViewer Lite for USB   w
206. munication      When COMMUNICATION TYPE is set to NETWORK BRIDGE  the CONTROL  port doesn t accept RS 232C commands        6 3 Communication port    For the NETWORK BRIDGE function  send the data from the computer to the  projector with using the Network Bridge Port that is configured in the  Port  Settings  of web browser     150     NOTE   Except for 9715  9716  9719  9720  5900  5500  4352 between 1024    and 65535 can be set up as the Network Bridge Port number  It is set to 9717  as the default setting        75    6 4 Transmission method    The transmission method can be selected from the menus  only when the  NETWORK BRIDGE is selected for the COMMUNICATION TYPE    EQOPTION menu     SERVICE   COMMUNICATION in the User s Manual      Operating Guide    HALF DUPLEX       FULL DUPLEX    6 4 1 HALF DUPLEX   This method lets the projector make two way communication  but only one  direction  either transmitting or receiving data  is allowed at a time    The method does not allow the projector to receive the data from the computer  while waiting for response data from an external device  After the projector  receives the response data from an external device or the response limit time is  past  the projector can receive the data from the computer    That means that the projector controls transmitting and receiving the data to  synchronize the communication     To use the HALF DUPLEX method  set up the RESPONSE LIMIT TIME following  the instructions below     TCP IP data Protoc
207. n button on the Floating  menu  the Options window is displayed     84    Settings   About     Optimize Performance     Transmission speed     Image quality             Keep PC resolution                Optimize Performance  The    LiveViewer Lite for USB    captures screenshots in JPEG data and  sends them to the projector  The    LiveViewer Lite for USB    has two options  that have different compression rate of JPEG data   Transmission speed  Speed takes priority over Image quality   It makes JPEG compression rate higher   The screen on the projector is rewritten quicker because the  transferred data is smaller  but the image quality is worse   Image quality  Image quality takes priority over Speed   It makes JPEG compression rate lower   The screen on the projector is rewritten slower because the transferred  data is larger  but the image quality is better     Keep PC resolution   If you remove the check mark from the  Keep PC resolution  box  the screen  resolution of your computer will be switched to XGA and the display speed may  be faster     NOTE     When the resolution is changed  the arrangement of icons on  computer desktop screen may be changed    About   The version information of the    LiveViewer Lite for USB        Maintenance    Replacing the lamp    A lamp has finite product life  Using the lamp for long periods of time could cause  the pictures darker or the color tone poor  Note that each lamp has a different  lifetime  and some may burst or burn out soon
208. n illustration or nearby  the symbol to the left indicates that  disassembly is prohibited      indicated in an illustration or nearby  the symbol to the left indicates that    e This symbol indicates a compulsory action  The contents will be clearly  the power plug should be disconnected from the power outlet      Safety Precautions   N WARNING    Never use the projector if a problem should occur    Abnormal operations such as smoke  strange odor  no image  no sound   excessive sound  damaged casing or elements or cables  penetration of  liquids or foreign matter  etc  can cause a fire or electrical shock    In such case  immediately turn off the power switch and then disconnect the  power plug from the power outlet  After making sure that the smoke or odor  has stopped  contact your dealer  Never attempt to make repairs yourself  because this could be dangerous      The power outlet should be close to the projector and easily accessible     Use special caution for children and pets    Incorrect handling could result in fire  electrical shock  injury  burn or vision   problem    Use special caution in households where children and pets are present    Do not insert liquids or foreign object    Penetration of liquids or foreign objects could result in fire or electrical shock    Use special caution in households where children are present    If liquids or foreign object should enter the projector  immediately turn off the   power switch  disconnect the power plug from the powe
209. n od  Then use the button    to execute   SERVICE    d NETWORK RESTART    Network will be once cut off when choose restart    If DHCP is selected on  IP address may be changed    After selecting RESTART EXECUTE  NETWORK menu may not be  controlled approx  30 seconds        66    SECOURI MANU    This projector is equipped with security functions   From the SECURITY menu  items shown in the table  below can be performed    To use SECURITY menu  User registration is required  before using the security functions     Enter the SECURITY menu   1  Use the A Y buttons on the SECURITY menu to select ENTER PASSWORD and press the  gt   button  The ENTER PASSWORD box will be displayed    2  Use the A     lt  P buttons to enter the registered password  The  factory default password is 9876  This password can be changed   below   Move the cursor to the right side of the ENTER  PASSWORD box and press the    button to display the SECURITY  menu    It is strongly recommended the factory default password to be  changed as soon as possible      If an incorrect password is input  the ENTER PASSWORD box  will be displayed again  If incorrect password is input 3 times  the  projector will turn off  Afterwards the projector will turn off every time  an incorrect password is input    3  Items shown in the table below can be performed     If you have forgotten your password    1   While the ENTER PASSWORD box is displayed  press and hold  the RESET button on the remote control for about 3 seconds or 
210. nail images    74    PC LESS Presentation  continued     Operating by buttons or keys    You can control the images in the Thumbnail screen with the remote control or  keypad or a web browser software  The following functions can be supported  while the Thumbnail is displayed                       Button operation   The remote The keypad on   Web Remote in web Functions   control the projector browser software    A V 4Al    AlY  lt   gt  UP DOWN LEFT RIGHT   Move cursor   PAGE UP   PAGE UP Swii  hespad  s   PAGE DOWN PAGE DOWN pag    Displays the selected  image on the Full Screen  mode when a cursor is  on a thumbnail image    ENTER INPUT ENTER   Displays the SETUP  menu  next  for the  selected image when a  cursor is on a thumbnail  image number                    The SETUP menu for the selected image    Functions          Use the  lt   gt  cursor buttons to switch each setting or use the   gt  cursor button to execute the functions as follows     RETURN ode  gt  cursor button or ENTER to return to the Thumbnail    Switch to ON to set the selected image as the first image in the  Slideshow  This setting information will be saved in the  playlist   txt  file    281      Switch to ON to set the selected image as the last image in the  Slideshow  This setting information will be saved in the    playlist   txt  file  E181      SKIP Switch to ON to skip the selected image in the Slideshow  This  setting information will be saved in the  playlist txt  file    281    Press the   
211. nch   cm   inch   cm   inch  30   0 8 0 9   34  1 0  41   41  16  5   2  10  38 11   45   39   15    1   0  40  10  12 55 2  13   61   15  60  sr  20   2        1 3 1 5   58   1 8   69   69  27   8   3   16    60   1 5    18 4  19  18 2 1 82 25  97   96  38   11   4   23   90  27 106  90   35    3    1     80 20    2 4 110 5  26    90   2 3    2 7 123 5    2 9  2 5    3 0 137 6   3 3  3 0    3 6 165 7  39  3 8   4 5 206   81   23   9   4 9   194  58  229  193  76    6    2    5 1    6 0 274   108  30   12   6 6   259   7 8   306   257  101   8    3    6 4   7 5   207 343 15  82  300   7 6   9 1   357   10 7  422   411   162  46   18   9 9   389   11 7  460   386   152    12   5                          continued on next page  7    Arrangement  continued     ANWARNING    Place the projector in a stable horizontal position  If the  projector falls or is knocked over  it could cause injury and or damage to the  projector  Using a damaged projector could then result in fire and or electric  shock      Do not place the projector on an unstable  slanted or vibrational surface such  as a wobbly or inclined stand      Do not place the projector on its side  front or rear position      Consult with your dealer before a special installation such as suspending from  a ceiling or somewhere else     gt  Place the projector in a cool place  and ensure that there is sufficient   ventilation  The high temperature of the projector could cause fire  burns and or   malfunction of the projector 
212. nd Mac OS  are registered trademarks of Apple Inc      Pentium  is a registered trademark of Intel Corp    e Adobe  and Acrobat    Reader  are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems  Incorporated    e Microsoft   and Internet explorer   Windows    Windows NT  Windows Vista  are  registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation      PowerPC  is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation      HDMI  the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or  registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries    All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners        End User License Agreement for the Projector Software    Software in the projector consists of the plural number of independent  software modules and there exist our copyright or and third party copyrights for  each of such software modules     Be sure to read  End User license Agreement for the Projector Software   which is separated document   in the CD        Projector    CP X2011N CP X2511N  ICP X3011N CP X4011N    User s Manual  detailed   Operating Guide   Technical    Example of computern signal    Resolution  H x V   H  frequency  kHz   V  frequency  Hz  Rating Signal mode  720 x 400 37 9 85 0 VESA TEXT    SVGA  56Hz                  VESA    E  1024x768     484     600   VESA   XGA 60Hz   1024 x 768 XGA  70Hz   1024x768        600           750   VESA   XGA 75Hz   1024 x 768 XGA  85Hz     S      S  832x624   497        
213. nd projector via a network  make sure that the  LAN port is selected as the input source on the projector   Operating in the  User s Manual     Operating Guide  Otherwise a connection cannot be established     1 3 1 Process overview    An overview of the process to connect your computer and the projector via a  network is shown below    The    LiveViewer    allows you to skip some of the steps below to establish a  network connection quickly and easily        Selecting the network connection mode If My Connection is    Wireless LAN selected    Wired LAN    My Connection       Enc n Sen method If Enter PassCode or      Configure Manually Select From List is    Select From List selected     Manual configuration    Profile If Profile or History is      History selected    Configure Network Settings Manually        amp  Configuring the network settings manually    G Confirming the connection to your destination    NOTE    Wireless LAN can be selected only when an access point to convert  wireless LAN to wired LAN exists between your computer and the projector        1 3 Process to connect the network  continued     1 3 2 Starting the  LiveViewer     Start the  LiveViewer  in your computer  taking one of the followings     1  Double click the  LiveViewer  icon on the Desktop in your computer  2  Select    Start     All Programs         Projector Tools       LiveViewer  on    Windows menu   Then  proceed to item 1 4 Selecting the network connection mode     110     1 4 Selecting th
214. nding on the indication on the  projector and the safety standard      The enclosed power cord must be used depending on the power outlet to  be used     Be cautious of the power cord connection    Incorrect connection of the power cord could result in fire or electrical shock     Do not touch the power cord with a wet hand      Check that the connecting portion of the power cord is clean  with no dust    before using  Use a soft and dry cloth to clean the power plug      Insert the power plug into a power outlet firmly  Avoid using a loose   unsound outlet or contact failure     Be sure to connect with ground wire    Connect the ground terminal of AC inlet of this unit with the ground terminal  provided at the building using the correct power cord  otherwise  fire or  electric shock can result      Don t take the core of power cord away     e   eo D    Surely connect  the ground wire      N WARNING    Be careful in handling the light source lamp    The projector uses a high pressure mercury glass lamp made of glass   The lamp can break with a loud bang  or burn out  When the bulb bursts   it is possible for shards of glass to fly into the lamp housing  and for gas  containing mercury to escape from the projector s vent holes    Please carefully read the section    Lamp        Be careful in handling the power cord and external connection  cables    If you keep using a damaged the power cord or cables  it can cause a fire  or electrical shock  Do not apply too much heat  press
215. ndition of the filter unit            continued on next page   55    Description          SERVICE   continued     KEY LOCK  Using the A V buttons turns on off the key lock feature  When ON  is selected  the buttons on the projector except the STANDBY ON  button are locked    ON    OFF    Please use this function to prevent tampering or accidental  operation  This function does not have any effect on the remote  control        REMOTE FREQ    1  Use the A Y button to change the projector s remote sensor  frequency setting  A4  16       2  Use the  lt  P gt  button to change the  projector s remote sensor on or off     ON  amp  OFF    The factory default setting is for both 1 NORMAL and 2 HIGH to be  on  If the remote control does not function correctly  disable either of  them    It s not possible to disable both options at the same time     Selecting this item displays COMMUNICATION  menu    In this menu  you can configure the serial  communication settings of the projector using the  CONTROL port     COMMUNICATION     Select an item using the cursor buttons A V   Then pressing the  gt  button opens the submenu  for the setting item you selected  Or  pressing   the  lt  button instead of the    button makes the  menu back to the previous one without changing  the setup  Each submenu can be operated as  described above    e When COMMUNICATION TYPE  457  is set to  OFF  the other items in COMMUNICATION menu  are invalid      For the function of serial communication  refer to  th
216. ng sure that the projector is cool adequately  lightly wipe the lens    with a commercially available lens cleaning wipe  Do not touch the lens  directly with your hand     Caring for the cabinet and remote control    Incorrect care could have adverse influence such as discoloration  peeling paint   etc     1 Turn the projector off  and unplug the power cord  Allow the projector to cool    sufficiently     2 After making sure that the projector is cool adequately  lightly wipe with gauze    or a soft cloth   If the projector is extremely dirty  dip soft cloth in water or a neutral cleaner  diluted in water  and wipe lightly after wringing well  Then  wipe lightly with a  soft  dry cloth     ANWARNING     Before caring  make sure the power cord is not plugged in   and then allow the projector to cool sufficiently  The care in a high temperature  state of the projector could cause a burn and or malfunction to the projector     gt  Never try to care for the inside of the projector personally  Doing is so  dangerous     gt  Avoid wetting the projector or inserting liquids in the projector  It could result in  a fire  an electric shock  and or malfunction to the projector      Do not put anything containing water  cleaners or chemicals near the projector     Do not use aerosols or sprays    ANCAUTION     Please take right care of the projector according to the  following  Incorrect care could cause not only an injury but adverse influence  such as discoloration  peeling paint  etc
217. nited States of America and other countries and areas  PILIink    All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners                   Ea  1  Connection to the Network                              eene 4  1 1 System requirements oe eee cere eter eee eene mener 4  1 1 1 Required equipment preparation               ricette tet tici clone enter t ibn a 4  1 1 2 Hardware and software requirement for computer                   ssssssssseee 4  1 2 Installing the  LiVeVIGWOF  erreur rne tu RE Ee ne pu tee ERR Enna 6  1 2 1 Installing the  EIVeVIGWOE  2  crt cierta ce tr pe zo Pe ccs e etd tdt aerea 6  1 22 Updating the  Live VIG WOR   aucco oae os or E sue dto cents E eee eeu een Lor ines va adea musei resin 7  1 3 Process to connect the network                   sssesssssssssseeeeeeeenee 8  LEON PIOCESSOVERVISW  rz                          8  1 3 2 Starting the   LIVe VIBWOF        cesi depre caer Db cree err erred E cu e Eee ku es ocu TREENER 9  1 4 Selecting the network connection mode                     ss 10  1 4 1 Selecting either the wireless LAN or wired LAN                     sssseem 10  14 2  Selecting My COmmeClOn  sso as Meet Eye vinee bud ae ttt eres Cr cx e EAT Fa eR CIEN EUR EM 12  1 5 Selecting the network connection method                       sssssesee 14  1 5 1 PASSCOdE CONNECUOMN  susce c a eii btt etis C Xe om E ERO CELO HEURE CIE CAT Cn o TE RHPURE DER 15  1 6 Manual Configuration                     sss emen 23  1 6 1 Profile  GOnFieeliOn   
218. nother network   GATEWAY   address     Sehe This function can only be used when DHOP is set   continued  to OFF           Use the A     lt   gt  buttons to input the DNS  server address    The DNS server is a system to control domain  names and IP addresses on the Network     DNS SERVER    Use the A V buttons to enter the TIME   DIFFERENCE    Set the same TIME DIFFERENCE as the one  DEPERENGE set on your computer  If unsure  consult your IT   manager    Use the  gt  button to return to the menu after   setting the TIME DIFFERENCE     Use the A     lt   gt  buttons to enter the Year  last  two digits   Month  Date  Hour and Minute     DATE AND    The projector will override this setting and retrieve  TIME DATE AND TIME information from the Time server  when SNTP is enabled   ED Date Time Settings  in the User s Manual   Network Guide         continued on next page     61    Description     1  Use the A    buttons on the  NETWORK menu to select the  PROJECTOR NAME and press  the  gt  button  The PROJECTOR  NAME dialog will be displayed      2  The current PROJECTOR NAME will be displayed on the first 3  lines  Particular projector name is pre assigned by default   Use the A V 4    buttons and the ENTER or INPUT button to  select and enter characters   To erase 1 character at one time  press the RESET button or  press the  lt  and INPUT button at the same time  Also if you  move the cursor to DELETE or ALL CLEAR on screen and  push the ENTER or INPUT button  1 character or all c
219. nterruption  of the projector s internal mechanical performance which may interfere with cooling  fans speed or stopping  and may cause the projector to completely shut down     OOO o    AN    QO        N CAUTION    Remove the power cord for complete separation     For safety purposes  disconnect the power cord if the projector is not to be   used for prolonged periods of time  5i yis     Before cleaning  turn off and unplug the projector  Neglect could result in Biuedtomilie   fire or electrical shock  power outlet     Ask your dealer to cleaning inside of the projector about every   year    Accumulations of dust inside the projector cause result in fire or malfunction    Cleaning inside is more effective if performed before every humid periods AN  such as rainy season      Do not clean inside yourself because it is dangerous     NOTE    Do not give the remote control any physical impact    A physical impact could cause damage or malfunction of the remote control     Take care not to drop the remote control      Do not place the projector or heavy objects on the remote control     Take care of the lens      Close the slide lens door or attach the lens cap to prevent the lens surface being  scratched when the projector is not used      Do not touch the lens to prevent fog or dirt of the lens that cause deterioration of display  quality      Use commercially available lens tissue to clean the lens  used to clean cameras   eyeglasses  etc    Be careful not to scratch the lens w
220. ntinued     Phenomenon    Cases not involving a machine defect    Reference  page          Network does  not work    NETWORK  BRIDGE  function does  not work    Schedule  function does  not work       The SAVING function is working   Select NORMAL for STANDBY MODE item in the  SETUP menu     The NETWORK BRIDGE function is turned off     Select NETWORK BRIDGE for COMMUNICATION TYPE  item in the OPTION   SERVICE   COMMUNICATION  menu     The SAVING function is working     Select NORMAL for STANDBY MODE item in the  SETUP menu        41    NOTE   Although bright spots or dark spots may appear on the screen  this  is a unique characteristic of liquid crystal displays  and it does not constitute or  imply a machine defect     98       S NeMEMOMNS    Item    Specification          Product name  Liquid Crystal Panel    Liquid crystal projector  786 432 pixels  1024 horizontal x 768 vertical        Lamp     lt CP X2011N gt  190 W UHP   lt CP X2511N  CP X3011N  CP X4011N gt  210 W UHP       Speaker    16 W mono  8W x2        Power supply Rated current     lt CP X2011N gt AC 100 120 V  3 2 A  AC220 240 V  1 7 A    CP X2511N  CP X3011N  CP X4011N    AC 100 120 V  3 4 A  AC220 240 V  1 8A       Power consumption     lt CP X2011N gt AC 100 120 V  310 W  AC220 240 V  290 W    CP X2511N  CP X3011N  CP X4011N gt   AC 100 120 V  330 W  AC220 240 V  310 W       Temperature range    5   35  C  Operating        Size    317  W  x 98  H  x 288  D  mm    Not including protruding parts  Please refer
221. ntinuous   or   repetitious use  the lifetime may be shortened  and these parts may need to be replaced   even if one year has not passed since the beginning of using      Any inclining use beyond the adjustment range explained in these user s manuals may  shorten the lifetimes of the consumables     Before turning on the power  make the projector cool down adequately    After turning the projector off  pushing the restart switch or interrupting of the power supply   make the projector cool down adequately  Operation in a high temperature state of the  projector causes a damage of the electrode and un lighting of the lamp     Avoid strong rays   Any strong ray  such as direct rays of the sun or room lighting  onto the remote control  sensors could invalidate the remote control     Avoid radio interference   Any interfering radiation could cause disordered image or noises     Avoid radio generator such as a mobile telephone  transceiver  etc  around the projector     About displaying characteristic    The display condition of the projector  such as color  contrast  etc   depends on  characteristic of the screen  because the projector uses a liquid crystal display panel  The  display condition can differ from the display of CRT      Do not use a polarized screen  It can cause red image     Turn the power on off in right order    To prevent any trouble  turn on off the projector in right order mentioned below unless  specifying      Power on the projector before the computer or 
222. nual and the other manuals for this product     Features  This projector has the network function that brings you the following main features     v Network Presentation   allows the projector to project computer images transmitted  through a network     237    Y Web Control   allows you to monitor and control the projector through a network from a  computer   1145    v My Image  allows the projector to store up to four still images and project them     170     Y Messenger   allows the projector to display text sent from a computer through a network      172    v Network Bridge   allows you to control an external device through the projector from a  computer   8274     NOTE   The information in this manual is subject to change without notice     The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in    this manual     The reproduction  transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not  permitted without express written consent        Trademark acknowledgment     Microsoft and Internet Explorer  Windows  Windows Vista are registered trademark of  Microsoft Corporation      Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation      JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems  Inc      HDMI  the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or  registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries     Trademark PJLink is a trademark applied for trademark rights in         Japan  the U
223. ol change Serial data    Ethernet RS 232C  LAN cable RS 232C cable                                              External device    Computer    Transmitting data       Response limit  time       Discarding data        Response data pui a    Using the RESPONSE LIMIT TIME menu  set the waiting time for response data  from an external device   LB OPTION menu     SERVICE   COMMUNICATION  in the User s Manual     Operating Guide    OFF e 1s   2s   3s  e OFF     76    6 4 Transmission method  Continued     NOTE   With using the HALF DUPLEX method  the projector can send out  254 byte data as maximum at once     If it is not required to monitor the response data from an external device and    the RESPONSE LIMIT TIME is set to OFF  the projector can receive the data  from the computer and send it out to an external device continuously   The OFF is selected as the default setting        6 4 2 FULL DUPLEX    This method lets the projector make two way communication  transmitting and  receiving data at the same time  without monitoring response data from an  external device    With using this method  the computer and an external device will send the data  out of synchronization  If it is requited to synchronize them  set the computer to  make the synchronization     NOTE   In case that the computer controls to synchronize transmitting    and receiving the data  it may not be able to control an external device well  depending on the processing status of the projector        77    T   uner
224. older  cich Newt To icta to a disent folder  chick Browne and select  anciher de       8  Confirm the program folder name  If  Projector DUE RAINER  Tools  is okay  press the  Next  to continue   If not  enter the desired folder name and then  press the  Next      Select Progam Folder    9  The Hardware Installation dialog appears   utres  Press Continue Anyway  titi mt mr    Broar Folder    NOTE   After sequence 8   the Windows Security  dialog will appear if you are using Windows Vista     Please click the  Install this driver software  anyway  and continue installation        10  After a moment  installation will complete and  the Setup Complete dialog will appear as ics V Dio  shown on the right  Click the  Finish   This EN ER Md  completes the software installation  Then your  computer automatically restarts     1  To confirm that the software has been  properly installed  press the  Start  button  on the toolbar  select All Programs and  then select the Projector Tools folder     2  The  LiveViewer  will appear in that folder  if the installation was successful     1 2 2 Updating the    LiveViewer       Please check and get the latest version at Hitachi Web site   http   hitachi us digitalmedia or http   www hitachidigitalmedia com   Some functions explained in this manual require the  LiveViewer  Version 4 xx   In   the version information a number between 00 and 99 will replace the xx         7    1 3 Process to connect the network    Before connecting your computer a
225. omparire nel presente  manuale    E  vietata la riproduzione  la trasmissione o l utilizzo del presente documento o del suo  contenuto senza espressa autorizzazione scritta     MERK   Informasjonen i denne h  ndboken kan endres uten varsel    Produsenten p  tar seg intet  ansvar for eventuelle feil som fremkommer i denne h  ndboken    Reproduksjon  overf  ring eller bruk  av dette dokumentet eller deler av det  er ikke tillatt uten uttrykt skriftlig tillatelse     OPMERKING   De informatie in deze handleiding kan zonder voorafgaande kennisgeving veranderd  worden    De fabrikant neemt geen enkele verantwoordelijkheid voor de eventuele fouten in deze  handleiding    Reproductie  overdracht of het gebruik van dit document is niet toegestaan  zonder  uitdrukkelijke toestemming van de betreffende partij     NOTA    As informa    es contidas neste manual est  o sujeitas a altera    es sem aviso pr  vio      O fabricante nao se responsabiliza por quaisquer erros que possam surgir neste manual      A reprodu    o  transmiss  o ou utiliza    o deste documento ou do seu conte  do nao    permitida sem  autoriza    o expressa por escrito    BAAD  APPWAHWASADRTRAMAMRERE  A mAIRE ANA ERRERA f  ETRE   RARTEDS Gl  PAAMEAADHRINERAR    gre    BA NAAA Me USS at  99  8s So  AFA   EAE BARE  EB  A soe  A 2369 Wa Val Aas abd Bech  BA qas SUE S NEF  og SAHAY Aalst  AHEHE WS Ad PU   NOTERA    Informationen i denna bruksanvisning kan komma att   ndras utan f  rvarning     Tillverkaren  p  tar sig ing
226. or  ENTER button    The screen will then return to the RESOLUTION menu  displaying the previous resolution      For some pictures  this function may not work well     it RESOLUTION    STANDARD  l       39    SEU  menu    From the SETUP menu  items shown in the table  below can be performed    Select an item using the A V cursor buttons  and  press the    cursor button or ENTER button to  execute the item  Then perform it according to the    following table        Description          AUTO KEYSTONE    KEYSTONE    AUTO ECO MODE    Selecting this item performs the Automatic keystone distortion  correction  Projector automatically corrects vertical keystone  distortion due to the  forward backward  setup angle by itself    This function will be executed only once when selected in the menu   When the slant of the projector is changed  execute this function again       The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs  For  some input  this function may not work well      When V INVERT or H amp V INVERT is selected to the MIRROR item  in the SETUP menu  if the projector screen is inclined or angled  downward  this function may not work correctly      When the zoom adjustment is set to the TELE  telephoto focus    this function may be excessive  This function should be used when  the zoom adjustment is set to the full WIDE  wide angle focus   whenever possible      When the projector is placed on the level  about  4     this function  may not work      When the projector 
227. ord during this time   Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or the    button on the  projector will return to the TRANSITION DETECTOR on off menu     Please do not forget your TRANSITION DETECTOR password     This function will activate only when the projector is started after turning off  the AC power     This feature may not function properly if the projector is not in a stable  position when ON is selected     2 Turning off the TRANSITION DETECTOR   2 1 Follow the procedure in 1 1 to display the TRANSITION DETECTOR on off menu    2 2 Select OFF to display the ENTER  PASSWORD box  large   Enter the registered  password and the screen will return to the  TRANSITION DETECTOR on off menu    If an incorrect password is input  the menu will   close  If necessary  repeat the process from 2 1     3 If you have forgotten your password   3 1 Follow the procedure in 1 1 to display the TRANSITION DETECTOR on off menu    3 2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box  large   The 10 digit  Inquiring Code will be displayed inside the box    3 3 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code  Your password will  be sent after your user registration information is confirmed      large         continued on next page   70    Description    The MY TEXT PASSWORD function can prevent the MY TEXT from being  overwritten  When the password is set for the MY TEXT      The MY TEXT DISPLAY menu will be unavailable  which can prohibit  changing the DISPLAY setting      The MY TEXT
228. ort     A SCART adapter or SCART cable is required for a SCART RGB  input to the projector  For details  contact your dealer               continued on next page     36    Description    The video format for S VIDEO port and VIDEO port can be set    1  Use the A Y buttons to   select the input port    2  Using the  lt   gt  buttons   Switches the mode for video   format    VIDEO FORMAT AUTO    NTSC  amp  PAL    SECAM  ft N PAL  amp  M PAL       NTSC4 43 fl     This item is performed only for a video signal from the VIDEO port  or the S VIDEO port     The AUTO mode automatically selects the optimum mode     The AUTO operation may not work well for some signals  If the  picture becomes unstable  e g  an irregular picture  lack of color    please select the mode according to the input signal           Using the A    cursor buttons switches the video format for an  input from the HDMI port     AUTO   VIDEO    amp  COMPUTER  tt i             Feature   HDMI FORMAT   AUTO automatically sets the optimum mode   VIDEO sets the suitable mode for DVD signals   COMPUTER sets the suitable mode for computer signals       When the COMPUTER is selected  the functions COLOR   PICTURE menu   TINT  PICTURE menu  and OVER SCAN   IMAGE menu  are unavailable                       Using the A Y cursor buttons changes the digital range for input  from the HDMI port     AUTO     NORMAL    ENHANCED  ft 4             Feature  AUTO automatically sets the optimum mode   NORMAL sets the suitable mode for D
229. place the projector near humidifiers  smoking spaces or a kitchen     gt  Position the projector to prevent light from directly hitting the projector s remote  Sensor     gt  Do not place the product in a place where radio interference may be caused     gt  Do not place this product in a magnetic field     Connecting with your devices    Before connecting the projector to a device  consult the manual of the device to  confirm that the device is suitable for connecting with this projector and prepare  the required accessories  such as a cable in accord with the signal of the device   Consult your dealer when the required accessory did not come with the product or  the accessory is damaged    After making sure that the device and projector are turned off  connect them  following the instructions below      ANWARNING P Use only the appropriate accessories  Otherwise it could cause   a fire or damage to the device and the projector      Use only the accessories specified or recommended by the projector s  manufacturer  Consult your dealer when the required accessory did not come  with the product or the accessory is damaged  It may be regulated under some  standard      For a cable with a core at only one end  connect the end with the core to the  projector  That may be required by EMI regulations      Neither disassemble nor modify the projector and the accessories      Do not use the damaged accessory  Be careful not to damage the accessories   Route a cable so that it is neith
230. play a test pattern for checking the effect of your  adjustment by pressing the ENTER button    Each time you press the ENTER button  the   pattern changes as below     No pattern  gt  Gray scale of 9 steps     ftL    Ramp     Gray scale of 15 steps    The eight equalizing bars correspond to eight tone levels of the test  pattern  Gray scale of 9 steps  except the darkest in the left end  If you  want to adjust the 2nd tone from left end on the test pattern  use the  equalizing adjustment bar    1     The darkest tone at the left end of the  test pattern cannot be controlled with any of equalizing adjustment bar     Lines or other noise might appear on the    screen when this function is operated  but it       is not a malfunction         continued on next page     30    Description          Using the A V buttons switches the color temperature mode     1HIGH     1CUSTOM    2MID  amp  2CUSTOM  g g  6 CUSTOM 3 LOW    g  6 Hi BRIGHT 3 3 CUSTOM  g g  5 CUSTOM    5 Hi BRIGHT 2  amp  4 CUSTOM   e 4 Hi BRIGHT 1    To adjust CUSTOM  Selecting a mode whose name includes  CUSTOM and then pressing the    button  or the ENTER button displays a dialog  to aid you in adjusting the OFFSET and  GAIN of the selected mode   COLOR TEMP   OFFSET adjustments change the color intensity on the whole tones  of the test pattern   GAIN adjustments mainly affect color intensity on the brighter tones  of the test pattern   Choose an item using the  lt   gt  buttons  and adjust the level using  the A    
231. problems elsewhere besides the lamp  If this happens    contact your local dealer or a service representative      Handle with care  jolting or scratching could cause the lamp bulb to burst  Q during use      Using the lamp for long periods of time  could cause it dark  not to light up   or to burst  When the pictures appear dark  or when the color tone is poor    please replace the lamp as soon as possible  Do not use old  used  lamps    this is a cause of breakage     Regulatory Notices    FCC Statement Warning    This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules  Operation is subject to the following  two conditions   1  This device may not cause harmful interference  and  2  this device  must accept any interference received  including interference that may cause undesired  operation     WARNING  This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a  Class B digital device  pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules  These limits are designed  to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation   This equipment generates  uses  and can radiate radio frequency energy and  if not  installed and used in accordance with the instructions  may cause harmful interference  to radio communications  However  there is no guarantee that interference will not occur  in a particular installation  If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio  or television reception  which can be determined by turning the equipment off 
232. r  destination     2130       Not to connect  click the  No  then the Cj e   LiveViewer  main menu is displayed even  though the network is not established   Click  4 on the main menu to go back  to item 1 5 Selecting the network  connection method   14     29    1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination    1 8 1 Connection and transmission       When the network connection is established     Connection to Projector successful     the    Connection to Projector successful  screen Projector name  PR  0129567093  is displayed  Poike o  19208110   Are you sure that you want to display images on the projector   Make sure that the right projector that you want ENTONCES  to send your image to is selected  by checking  the projector name and IP address shown in  the screen    Ye No      To send images to the projector  click the  Yes   The transmission will be started   To display the transmitted images  select the LAN port as input source on the  projector       Not to send  click the  No   then the    LiveViewer    main menu is displayed  in stand by mode   The stand by mode is the condition that the wireless  connection is established  but the images are not transmitted    The transmission can be started  if you click    or  amp  button on the    LiveViewer     main menu     If you wish to use the current connection setting as a profile data for My    Connection  check in the box for the  Register this setting to My Connection       Troubleshooting     E This projector is
233. r INPUT button   1 character or all characters will be  erased  The MY TEXT can be input up  to 24 characters on each line    3  To change an already inserted  character  press the A V button to  move the cursor to one of the first 3  lines  and use the  lt  P gt  buttons to  move the cursor on the character to be  changed   After pressing the ENTER or INPUT button  the character is selected   Then  follow the same procedure as described at the item  2  above    4  To finish entering text  move the cursor to the OK on screen and press  the  gt   ENTER or INPUT button  To revert to the previous MY TEXT  without saving changes  move the cursor to the CANCEL on screen and  press the   4  ENTER or INPUT button     The MY TEXT WRITING function is available only when the MY TEXT  PASSWORD function is set to OFF        PIRSA NOM  OAS    The projector has the following two convenient tools that enable on screen presentations  easily and quickly      PC LESS Presentation    Llbelow      USB Display    282     PC LESS Presentation    The PC LESS Presentation reads image data from storage media inserted into  the USB TYPE A port and displays the image on the following modes    The PC LESS Presentation can be started by selecting the USB TYPE A port as the input source   This feature allows you to make your presentations without using your computer       Thumbnail mode  474     Full Screen mode    178     Slideshow mode  79      Supported storage media     USB memory  USB memory type  US
234. r outlet and contact   your dealer      Do not place the projector near water  ex  a bathroom  a beach  etc        Do not expose the projector to rain or moisture  Do not place the projector   outdoors      Do not place flower vases  pots  cups  cosmetics  liquids such as water  etc   on or around the projector      Do not place metals  combustibles  etc on or around the projector      To avoid penetration of foreign objects  do not put the projector into a case  or bag together with any thing except the accessories of the projector   signal cables and connectors    Never disassemble and modify    The projector contains high voltage components  Modification and or disassembly of   the projector or accessories could result in fire or electrical shock      Never open the cabinet      Ask your dealer to repair and clean insider    Do not give the projector any shock or impact    If the projector should be shocked and or broken  it could result in an injury    and continued use could result in fire or electrical shock    If the projector is shocked  immediately turn off the power switch  disconnect   the power plug from the power outlet and contact your dealer     Do not place the projector on an unstable surface    If the projector should be dropped and or broken  it could result in an injury   and continued use could result in fire or electrical shock      Do not place the projector on an unstable  slant or vibrant surface such as  a wobbly or inclined stand      Use the caster
235. r several  minutes  If also the BLANK screen is the MyScreen or ORIGINAL   the plain black screen is instead used     When the ON is selected to the MyScreen PASSWORD item in  the SECURITY menu    68   the START UP is fixed to MyScreen         continued on next page     44    Description          This item allows you to capture an image for use as a MyScreen  image which can be used as the BLANK screen and START UP  screen  Display the image you want to capture before executing the  following procedure   1  Selecting this item displays a dialog  titled  MyScreen   It will ask you if  you start capturing an image from  the current screen   Please wait for the target image to be displayed  and press the  ENTER or INPUT button when the image is displayed  The image  will freeze and the frame for capturing will appear   To stop performing  press the RESET button on the remote  control     Using the A     lt   gt  buttons adjusts the  frame position   Please move the frame to the position  of the image which you want to use  The  MyScreen frame may not be able to be moved for    some input signals   To start registration  press the ENTER H  or INPUT button on the remote control   To restore the screen and return to the previous dialog  press the  RESET button on the remote control   Registration takes several minutes   When the registration is completed  the registered screen and the  following message is displayed for several seconds      MyScreen registration is finished      If
236. r temperature setting   COLOR Adjusts the color setting   TINT Adjusts the tint setting   SHARPNESS Adjusts the sharpness setting   Selects the active iris setting   This item is available only for  ACTIVE IRIS CP X2511N  CP X3011N EN N        MYMEMORY SAVE Saves the MyMemory data   MYMEMORY RECALL   Recalls the MyMemory data   IMAGE  ASPECT Selects the aspect setting   OVER SCAN Adjusts the over scan setting   V POSITION Adjusts the vertical position   H POSITION Adjusts the horizontal position   H PHASE Adjusts the horizontal phase   H SIZE Adjusts the horizontal size   eA igs Performs the automatic adjustment   INPUT  PROGRESSIVE Selects the progressive setting   VIDEO NR Selects the video noise reduction setting   COLOR SPACE Selects the color space   COMPONENT Selects the COMPONENT port setting   S VIDEO FORMAT Selects the s video format setting   C VIDEO FORMAT Selects the video format setting   HDMI FORMAT Selects the HDMI format setting   HDMI RANGE Selects the HDMI range setting   COMPUTER IN1 Selects the COMPUTER IN1 input signal type   COMPUTER IN2 Selects the COMPUTER IN2 input signal type   AEE Turns the FRAME LOCK COMPUTER IN1 function on off   MUERE Turns the FRAME LOCK COMPUTER IN2 function on off   FRAME LOCK   HDMI   Turns the FRAME LOCK HDMI function on off        62    Item    3 10 Projector Control  Continued        Description          SETUP       AUTO KEYSTONE    Performs the automatic keystone distortion setting                          EXECUTE   KEYST
237. ration between the equipment and receiver      Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the  receiver is connected      Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help        ENGLISH E    INSTRUCTIONS TO USERS  This equipment complies with the requirements of  FCC  Federal Communication Commission  equipment provided that the following  conditions are met  Some cables have to be used with the core set  Use the  accessory cable or a designated type cable for the connection  For cables that  have a core only at one end  connect the core to the projector     CAUTION  Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party  responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the  equipment     Regulatory notices  continued     About Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment    The mark is in compliance with the Waste Electrical and Electronic    Equipment Directive 2002 96 EC  WEEE    The mark indicates the requirement NOT to dispose the equipment  including any spent or discarded batteries or accumulators as unsorted  municipal waste  but use the return and collection systems available   If the batteries or accumulators included with this equipment  display  the chemical symbol Hg  Cd  or Pb  then it means that the battery has a  heavy metal content of more than 0 000596 Mercury or more than  0 00296  Cadmium  or more than 0 00496 Lead     Contents of package   Your projector should come with the item
238. rd that came with the projector  If itis damaged  consult  your dealer to get a new one      Only plug the power cord into an outlet whose voltage is matched to the power  cord  The power outlet should be close to the projector and easily accessible   Remove the power cord for complete separation      Never modify the power cord     Turning on the power                                                                   1 Make sure that the power cord is firmly STANDBY ON button    and correctly connected to the projector POWER indicator  and the outlet   TR m      Make sure that the POWER indicator is P    we    steady orange  Then remove the lens   od    mu  cover  IJ  3 Press the STANDBY ON button on the    5    projector or the remote control  SEES S Q  5   Ys QI  The projection lamp will light up and the d d L  POWER indicator will begin blinking in oos  green  When the power is completely on  the Qs           indicator will stop blinking and light in steady  green     AWARNING    A strong light is emitted when the projector s power is on  Do  not look into the lens of the projector or look inside of the projector through any  of the projector s openings     NOTE   Please power on the projector prior to the connected devices     The projector has the DIRECT POWER ON function  which can make the    projector automatically turn on  For more information  please see  Operating  Guide      117  19        Adjusting the projector s elevator  When the place to put the projector is
239. res cm DR UEEE xi 3    Checking the contents of package    3    Part names              sllluus  4  Setting up                e  7  Arrangement                2 5 7  Connecting with your devices       9  Connecting to a power supply       14  Using the security bar and slot     14  Remote control             15  Installing the batteries             15  About the remote control signal     15    Changing the frequency of remote control signal     16  Using as a simple PC mouse  amp  keyboard     16    Power on off                17  Turning on the power             17  Turning off the power             17   Operating                  18  Adjusting the volume              18  Temporarily muting the sound       18  Selecting an input signal           18  Searching an input signal          20  Selecting an aspect ratio          20  Adjusting the projector s elevator     21  Adjusting the zoom and focus       21    Using the automatic adjustment feature      22  Adjusting the position  Correcting the keystone distortions    23    Using the magnify feature          24  Temporarily freezing the screen     25  Temporarily blanking the screen 25  Using the menu function          26  EASY MENU                28    AsPECT  AUTO KEYSTONE   KEYSTONE   PICTURE MODE  Eco mope  Mirror  RESET   FILTER TIME  LANGUAGE  ADVANCED MENU  EXIT  PICTURE menu               BRIGHTNESS  CONTRAST  GAMMA  COLOR TEMP   CoLoR  TINT  SHARPNESS  ACTIVE IRIS  MY MEMORY  IMAGE menu      22000008  ASPECT  OVER SC
240. ride time settings when SNTP is enabled      The internal clock s time may not remain accurate  Using SNTP is  recommended to maintain accurate time        59    3 9 Security Settings       Displays and configures passwords and other security settings     Item Description          User Account Configures the user name and password     Configures the user name   User name The length of the text can be up to 32 alphanumeric  characters     Configures the password   Password The length of the text can be up to 255 alphanumeric  characters              Re enter Password Reenter the above password for verification     Configures the Authentication password for the command  control     Authentication Configures the Authentication password  The length of the  Password text can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters    Re enter  Authentication Reenter the above password for verification   Password  SNMP Configures the community name if SNMP is used     Configures the community name  The length of the text can  be up to 64 alphanumeric characters        twork Control                Community name             Click the  Apply  button to save the settings     NOTE   The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the  network connection  When the configuration settings are changed  you must  restart the network connection  You can restart the network connection by    clicking the  Network Restart  on the main menu     Only numbers  0 9  and alphabet    a z      A Z  can be us
241. ries used   ACAUTION P Avoid placing the projector in smoky  humid or dusty place     gt  Position the projector to prevent light from directly hitting the projector s remote sensor     6    Connecting with your devices    Be sure to read the manuals for devices before connecting them to the projector   Make sure that all the devices are suitable to be connected with this product  and  prepare the cables required to connect  Please refer to the following illustrations    to connect them        ENGLISH B    For details  please see  User s Manual     Operating Guide  and  Network Guide         317  19     When AUTO is selected for the COMPUTER IN1 or COMPUTER IN2 port    in COMPUTER IN of the INPUT menu  that port will accept component video    signals     To use network functions of the projector  connect the LAN port with the    computer s LAN port  or with an access point that is connected to the computer  with wireless LAN  using a LAN cable                       VCR DVD Blu ray  Disc player         Access  point       NVI        i  i  r       IINGH             COMPONENT     ino                                                                         asn olanv        v                                         AUDIO  OUT                                      Av 1dSIa                L VIDEO     22                  T                                             Oec  c  Su                                                                                        R      If you insert a 
242. rt1  Port  23    TCP  9715  Network Control Port2  Port  9715      NOTE   Command control is available only via the specified port above     Command Control Settings    150     Configure the following items from a web browser when command control is used     Example  If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10    1  Enter    http   192 168 1 10     into the address bar of the web browser   2  Enter your user name and password  and then click the  OK     3  Click the  Port Settings  on the main menu        4  Click the  Enable  check box to open Network Control Port1  Port  23  to use  TCP 223  Click the  Enable  check box for the  Authentication  setting when  authentication is required  otherwise clear the check box    5  Click the  Enable  check box to open Network Control Port2  Port  9715  to  use TCP  9715  Click the  Enable  check box for the  Authentication  setting  when authentication is required  otherwise clear the check box    6  Click the  Apply  button to save the settings     84    7 4 Command Control via the Network  Continued     When the authentication setting is enabled  the following settings are required    60     7  Click the  Security Settings  on the main menu   8  Click the  Network Control  and enter the desired authentication password       See NOTE   9  Click the  Apply  button to save the settings     NOTE   The Authentication Password will be the same for Network Control  Port1  Port  23   Network Control Port2  Port  9715   PJLink 
243. rther information    7  Click the  Apply  button to save the settings     Failure Warning e mails are formatted as follows     Subject line     Mail title    Projector name      Text     Mail text gt   Date   Failure Warning date    Time   Failure Warning time   IP Address   Projector IP address gt     MAC Address       Projector MAC address gt     79    7 2 Projector Management using SNMP    The SNMP  Simple Network Management Protocol  enables to manage the  projector information  which is a failure or warning status  from the computer on  the network  The SNMP management software will be required on the computer  to use this function     NOTE   It is recommended that SNMP functions be carried out by a network  administrator       SNMP management software must be installed on the computer to monitor  the projector via SNMP        SNMP Settings    50   Configure the following items via a web browser to use SNMP     Example  If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10    1  Enter    http   192 168 1 10     into the address bar of the web browser   2  Enter your user name and password  and then click the  OK     3  Click the  Port Settings  on the main menu    4  Click the  Download MIB file  to download a MIB file     NOTE   To use the downloaded MIB file  specify the file by your SNMP  manager     5  Click the  Enable  check box to open the SNMP Port  Set the IP address to  send the SNMP trap to when a Failure Warning occurs     NOTE   A Network Restart is requ
244. s  Text information        CHANNEL  Select Closed Caption CHANNEL from following options using A V  buttons     190920304    Channel 1  primary channel   language  Channel 2    Channel 3  4  Channel 4  The channel data may vary  depending on the content  Some  channel might be used for secondary language or empty     1  2  3       49    OPON MANU    From the OPTION menu  items shown in the table  below can be performed    Select an item using the A V cursor buttons  and  press the  gt  cursor button or ENTER button to execute  the item  except for the items LAMP TIME and FILTER  TIME  Then perform it according to the following table        Description          AUTO SEARCH    AUTO  KEYSTONE    DIRECT POWER  ON    Using the A    buttons turns on off the automatic signal search  function     ON  amp  OFF  When the ON is selected  detecting no signal automatically cycles  through input ports in the following order  The search is started from  the current port  Then when an input is found  the projector will stop  searching and display the image     ce PUTER IN1  gt  COMPUTER IN2  gt  LAN  gt  USB TYPE A          VIDEO     S VIDEO    COMPONENT    HDMI   USB TYPE B   Y  Cb Pb  Cr Pr       It may take several seconds to project the images from the  USB TYPE B port     Using the A V buttons turns on off the automatic keystone function   ON  amp  OFF    ON   Automatic keystone distortion correction will be executed   whenever changing the slant of the projector    OFF   This function 
245. s  The maximum length of host or domain name is up  to 255 characters        Configures the sender e mail address   Sender E mail address The length of the sender e mail address can be up to 255  alphanumeric characters     Configures the e mail address of up to five recipients  You  can also specify the  TO  or  CC  for each address  The  length of the recipient e mail address can be up to 255  alphanumeric characters        Recipient E mail address          Click the  Apply  button to save the settings     NOTE   You can confirm whether the mail settings work correctly using the   Send Test Mail  button  Please enable Send mail setting before clicking the   Send Test Mail        If you connect the projector to an existing network  consult a network  administrator before setting server addresses        52    3 6 Alert Settings       Displays and configures failure  amp  alert settings     Description          Cover Error The lamp cover has not been properly fixed   Fan Error The cooling fan is not operating           The lamp does not light  and there is a possibility that interior    Lamp Error portion has become heated        There is a possibility that the interior portion has become  heated     Air Flow Error The internal temperature is rising     Cold Error There is a possibility that the interior portion has become  overcooled     Temp Error             Filter Error Filter time over     Other error   Other Error If displaying this error  please contact your dealer     
246. s  XP or later  CPU Pentium  processor 133MHz   Memory 32MB or more  Macintosh   OS Mac OS  10 2 or later  CPU PowerPC    Memory 32MB or more  CD ROM drive  4x CD ROM drive  Display  256 color   640x480 dots resolution  Applications  Microsoft  Internet Explorer 4 0 and  Adobe  Acrobat  Reader  4 0 or later    E How to use the CD  1  Insert CD into computer s CD ROM drive     ENGLISH    Windows    In a while  Web browser automatically starts  Start up  window comes up   Macintosh     1  Double click on the    Projectors    icon appeared on the    desktop screen    2  When    main htm     file is clicked  Web browser will start  and Initial window will appear   2  Click the model name of your projector first  and then click language you want  from the displayed list  The User s manual  detailed  will open     ACAUTION    Only use the CD ROM in a computer CD drive  The CD ROM  is designed for computer use only  NEVER INSERT THE CD ROM INTO A  NON COMPUTER CD PLAYER  Inserting the CD ROM into an incompatible  CD drive may produce a loud noise  which in turn MAY RESULT IN EAR AND  SPEAKER DAMAGE      After using CD ROM  please put it into CD case and keep it  Please keep  the CD neither in direct sunlight nor in a high temperature and high humidity  environment     NOTE   The information in the CD ROM is subject to change without notice   Please check our website where you may find the latest information for this  projector   L319      No responsibility is taken for any obstacle 
247. s  shown below  Check that all the items are  included  Require of your dealer immediately if  any items are missing      1  Remote control with two AA batteries                                   2  Power cord    3  Computer cable    4  Lens cover    5  User s manuals  Book x1  CD x1    6  Security label    7  Application CD             NOTE   Keep the original packing materials for future reshipment  Be sure  to use the original packing materials when moving the projector  Use special    caution for the lens        Preparations   Loading batteries into the remote control   Please insert the batteries into the remote control before using it  If the remote  control starts to malfunction  try to replace the batteries  If you will not use the  remote control for long period  remove the batteries from the remote control and  store them in a safe place     1 Holding the hook part of the battery    cover  remove it    2 Align and insert the two AA batteries     HITACHI MAXELL  Part No LR6 or R6P   according to their plus and minus terminals  as indicated in the remote control    3 Replace the battery cover in the direction of the arrow and snap it back into    place     AWARNING    Always handle the batteries with care and use them only as  directed  Improper use may result in battery explosion  cracking or leakage     which could result in fire  injury and or pollution of the surrounding environment       When replacing the batteries  replace both of the batteries with new batteri
248. sabled    FINE    amp  FAST    DISABLE   ft fj  FINE  Finer tuning including H SIZE adjustment   FAST Faster tuning  setting H SIZE to prearranged data for the  input signal      Depending on conditions  such as input image  signal cable to  the projector  environment around the projector  etc   the automatic  adjustment may not work correctly  In such a case  please                      SERVICE choose DISABLE to disable the automatic adjustment  and make  adjustment manually        GHOST   1  Select a color element of ghost using  the  lt   gt  buttons    2  Adjust the selected element using the  A  buttons to disappear ghost     FILTER MESSAGE  Use the A V button to set the timer for notifying by the message  when to replace the filter unit   100h      200h    500h      1000h      2000h    5000h    OFF  After choosing an item except OFF  the message  REMINDER      HRS PASSED       will appear after the timer reaches the interval  time set by this feature    192    When the OFF is chosen  the message will not appear  Utilize this  feature to keep the air filter clean  setting the suitable time according  to your environment of this projector     Please take care of the filter unit periodically  even if there is  no message  If the air filter becomes to be blocked by dust or  other matter  the internal temperature will rise  which could cause  malfunction  or reduce the lifetime of the projector     Please be careful with the operating environment of the projector  and the co
249. scription          OPTION       AUTO SEARCH    Turns the automatic signal search function on off        AUTO KEYSTONE    Turns the automatic keystone distortion correction function  on off        DIRECT POWER ON    Turns the direct power on function on off        AUTO POWER OFF    Configures the timer to shut off the projector when no signal  is detected        USB TYPEB    Selects the USB TYPE B setting        MY BUTTON 1    Assigns the functions for the MY BUTTON 1 button on the  included remote control        MY BUTTON 2    Assigns the functions for the MY BUTTON 2 button on the  included remote control        MY SOURCE    Selects the My Source setting        REMOTE FREQ     NORMAL    Turns the remote control signal frequency normal function  on off        REMOTE FREQ     HIGH             Turns the remote control signal frequency high function on   off     65    3 10 Projector Control  Continued        gnomes Lj T    The items shown in the table below can be  performed using the Projector Control menu   e Click the  QUIT PRESENTER MODE         Item Description          SERVICE    QUIT PRESENTER  MODE       Quit compulsorily from the Presenter mode           66    3 11 Remote Control    gu    You can use your Web browser to control the  projector             Do not attempt to control the projector with     gt  the projector   s remote control and via your Web  browser at the same time  It may cause some     operational errors in the projector        The functions on the bun
250. ser  Internet Explorer   6 0 or higher   Y CD ROM drive    NOTE     The network communication control is disabled while the projector is  in standby mode if the STANDBY MODE item is set to SAVING  Please connect  the network communication to the projector after setting the STANDBY MODE    to NORMAL   EQSETUP menu in the User s Manual     Operating Guide     You can get the latest version of the  LiveViewer  and the latest information  for this product from our website   7        1 1 System requirements  continued     NOTE   Set your computer s resolution to XGA or less  Refer to the user  manual for your computer or Windows  If it is larger than XGA  the transmission  speed will be reduced      If you use a screen resolution greater than XGA  the projector will shrink it to    XGA on screen      Images might not been transmitted  caused by OS version or the driver  software for Network Adapter on your computers  It is highly recommended that  OS and the driver should be updated to the latest        1 2 Installing the    LiveViewer     1 2 1 Installing the  LiveViewer     The  LiveViewer  software needs to be installed on all the computers to connect  to the projector through a network     If your OS is Windows XP or Vista  you need to log in as an administrator user to  install the software     1  Turn on the computer   2  Shut down all applications   3  Insert the accompanying CD ROM into the computer s CD ROM drive        4  After a moment  the Choose Setup Language  dialog
251. signal  of 480i 60 or 576i 50 or 1080i 50 60  and an HDMI  signal  of 480i 60 or 576i 50 or 1080i 50 60       When TV or FILM is selected  the screen image will be sharp   FILM adapts to the 2 3 Pull Down conversion system  But these  may cause a certain defect  for example  jagged line  of the picture  for a quick moving object  In such a case  please select OFF  even  though the screen image may lose sharpness     Using the A    buttons switches the noise reduction mode   HIGH  amp  MID    LOW  LF      This function works only for a video signal  s video signal  compo   nent video signal  of 480i 60 or 576i 50 or 1080i 50 60  and an  HDMI signal  of 480i 60 or 576i 50 or 1080i 50 60        When this function is excessive  it may cause a certain  degradation of the picture     Using the A    buttons switches the mode for color space    AUTO  amp  RGB    SMPTE240  amp  REC709  amp  REC601   ft f     This item can be selected only for a computer signal  except for  signals from the LAN  USB TYPE A and USB TYPE B ports  or a  component video signal  except SCART RGB      The AUTO mode automatically selects the optimum mode     The AUTO operation may not work well at some signals  In such a  case  it might be good to select a suitable mode except AUTO     Using the A    buttons switches the function of the COMPONENT   Y  Cb Pb  Cr Pr  port   COMPONENT  amp  SCART RGB  When the SCART RGB is selected  the COMPONENT  Y  Cb   Pb  Cr Pr  and VIDEO ports will function as a SCART RGB p
252. ssing the RESET button on the remote control or the    button  of the projector displays a dialog    To reset the lamp time  select the OK using the  gt  button     CANCEL  gt  OK      Please reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp   for a suitable indication about the lamp     For the lamp replacement  see the section  Replacing the lamp   185      The filter time is the usage time of the air filter  counted after the last  resetting  It is shown in the OPTION menu   Pressing the RESET button on the remote control or the    button  of the projector displays a dialog   To reset the filter time  select the OK using the    button    CANCEL  gt  OK    Please reset the filter time only when you have cleaned or replaced  the air filter  for a suitable indication about the air filter       For the air filter cleaning  see the section  Cleaning and replacing  the air filter     187  88       continued on next page     52    Description          This item is to assign one of the following functions to MY BUTTON  1 2 on the remote control  6     1  Use the A    buttons on the MY BUTTON menu to select a MY  BUTTON    1 2  and press the  gt  or ENTER button to display the  MY BUTTON setup dialog    2  Then using the A     lt   gt  buttons sets one of the following  functions to the chosen button  Press the ENTER or INPUT  button to save the setting     LAN  Selects input from LAN port     USB TYPE A  Selects input from USB TYPE A port     USB TYPE B  Selects input from 
253. ssion of your computer image will be started to display your image on  the screen     4  The icon   i on the main menu is replaced by the icon you selected     NOTE   The image transmission will be stopped  when you click the Single  mode button while the projector is in the Single PC mode or you click one of the  Multi mode buttons that shows the quarter screen which is currently displaying  your computer images in the Multi PC mode      If the Multi PC mode is selected  the projector screen is automatically divided  to 4 zones       If the Presenter mode is set on in the computer whose image is currently   on screen in the Single PC mode  the  amp  button cannot be clicked on other  computers       f you select one of the quarter screen buttons that indicates images sent from  another computer  the transmission of your computer image will be stopped        The display mode can be set also by using the MULTI PC MODE in the  PRESENTATION item in the NETWORK menu  The last setting will be active    Refer to QNETWORK menu in the User s Manual     Operating Guide for the  function on the projector      40    2 1 Using the  LiveViewer   continued     2 1 4 Option menu  Clicking the Option button displays the option menu on screen          Not displaying confirmation dialog for adding Network settings  4 7     Optimize Performance jg        Transmission speed  C Image quality    M Presenter Mode   a                                 jv Display User Name   Unnamed 1                 t
254. t BE EF   03   06 00   FB FF   05 00   93 30   00 00   User Gamma Execute BE EF   03   06 00   1   C2   06 00   53 70   00 00  Point 4 Reset   Get BE EF   03   06 00   38 FF   02 00   94 30   00 00   ed dale Increment BE EF   03   06 00   5E FF   04 00   94 30   00 00   Decrement BE EF   03   06 00   8F FE   05 00   94 30   00 00   psor gamma Execute BE EF   03   06 00   68 c3   06 00   54 70   00 00   Get BE EF   03   06 00   C4 FE   02 00   9530   00 00   user camma Increment BE EF   03   06 00   A2 FE   04 00   95 30   00 00   Decrement BE EF   03   06 00   73 FF   05 00   95 30   00 00    Eni ie Execute BE EF   03   06 00   94 C2   06 00   55 70   00 00                                   continued on next page     18          Names    Operation Type    Header    Command Data                                                                                                                                           CRC Action Type Type  Get BE EF   03   06 00   80 FE   02 00   96 30   00 00  cd Her Increment BE EF   03   06 00   EG FE   04 00   96 30   00 00  am Decrement BE EF   03   06 00   37 FF   05 00   96 30   00 00  User Gamma Execute BE EF   03   06 00   Do c2   06 oo   56 70   00 00  Point 7 Reset  Get BE EF   03   06 00   7C FF   02 00   97 30   00 00  iced e Increment BE EF   03   06 00   1A FF   0400   97 30   00 00  Decrement BE EF   03   06 00   CB FE   0500   97 30   00 00  User Gamma Execute BE EF   03   06 00   2C c3   06 00   57 70   00 00  Point 8 Reset  1 HI
255. t time it is used  it is possible       that there are electrical problems elsewhere besides the lamp  If this  happens  consult your local dealer or a service representative      Handle with care  jolting or scratching could cause the lamp bulb to burst during use     Using the lamp for long periods of time  could cause it dark  not to light up or to burst   When the pictures appear dark  or when the color tone is poor  please replace the  lamp as soon as possible  Do not use old  used  lamps  this is a cause of breakage           86    Cleaning and replacing the air filter    The air filter unit of this projector consists of a filter cover  two kinds of filters  and  a filter frame  The new double large filters system is expected to function longer   However  please check and clean it periodically to keep ventilation needed for  normal operation of the projector    When the indicators or a message prompts you to clean the air filter  comply with  it as soon as possible  Replace the filters when they are damaged or too soiled   To prepare new filters  make contact with your dealer and tell the following type  number     Type number   MU06481  Filter set     When you replace the lamp  please replace the air filter  An air filter of specified  type will come together with a replacement lamp for this projector     Filter cover       1 Turn the projector off  and unplug the power cord     Allow the projector to sufficiently cool down     2 Use a vacuum cleaner on and around the 
256. te BE EF   03   06 00   F8 C4   06 oo   48 70   00 00  Get BE EF   03   06 00   04 F5   02 00   B5 30   00 00  p Increment BE EF   03   06 00   62 F5   0400   B5 30   00 00  Decrement BE EF   03   06 00   B3 F4   0500   B5 30   00 00  COLOR TEMP  OFFSETR Execute BE EF   03   06 00   40 C5   06 00   4A 70   00 00  Reset  Get BE EF   03   06 00   40 F5   02 00   B6 30   00 00  EE Increment BE EF   03   06 00   26 F5   0400   B6 30   00 00  Decrement BE EF   03   06 00   F7 F4   0500   B6 30   00 00  COLOR TEMP  OFFSET G Execute BE EF   03   06 00   BC C4  06 00   4B 70   00 00  Reset                                continued on next page     19       Names    Operation Type    Header    Command Data                                                                                                                                                       CRC Action Type Type   Get BE EF   03   06 00   BC F4   0200   B7 30 00 00   nl Increment BE EF   03   06 00   DA F4   04 00   B7 30 00 00   Decrement BE EF   03   06 00   OB F5   05 00   B7 30 00 00   COLOR TEMP   OFFSET B Execute BE EF   03   06 00   C8 C5 06 00   4C 70 00 00  Reset   Get BE EF   03   06 00   B5 72   02 00   02 22 00 00   COLOR Increment BE EF   03   06 00   D3 72   04 00   02 22 00 00   Decrement BE EF   03   06 00   02 73   05 00   02 22 00 00   COLOR Reset Execute BE EF   03   06 00   80 DO   06 00   OA 70 00 00   Get BE EF   03   06 00   49 73   02 00   03 22 00 00   TINT Increment BE EF   03   06 00   2F 73   04 
257. te daylight savings time ends  0   59            Daylight Savings Time             Week       Day          Time                                        58    3 8 Date Time Settings  Continued     Item Description          Configures the time difference  Set the same time difference  Time difference as the one set on your computer  If unsure  consult your IT  manager        Click the  ON  check box to retrieve Date and Time  information from the SNTP server and set the following items     SNTP       Configures the SNTP server address in IP format      The address allows not only IP address but also domain  SNTP Server Address  name if the valid DNS server is setup in the Network  Settings  The maximum length of host or domain name is up  to 255 characters        Configures the interval at which to retrieve Date and Time    Cycle information from the SNTP server  hour minute               Click the  Apply  button to save the settings     NOTE   The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the  network connection  When the configuration settings are changed  you must  restart the network connection  You can restart the network connection by  clicking the  Network Restart  on the main menu      If you connect the projector to an existing network  consult a network  administrator before setting server addresses       To enable the SNTP function  the time difference must be set      The projector will retrieve Date and Time information from the time server and  over
258. ters  To erase 1  character at one time  press the RESET  button or press the  lt  and INPUT button  at the same time  Also if you move the  cursor to DELETE or ALL CLEAR on  screen and press the ENTER or INPUT  button  1 character or all characters will  be erased  The name can be a maximum   SOURCE NAME of 16 characters    Continued   7  To change an already inserted character   press the A button to move the cursor to  the first line  and use the  lt  P gt  buttons to  move the cursor on the character to be  changed   After pressing the ENTER or INPUT button  the character is  selected  Then  follow the same procedure as described at the  item  6  above     8  To finish entering text  move the cursor to the OK on screen and  press the  gt   ENTER or INPUT button  To revert to the previous  name without saving changes  move the cursor to the CANCEL  on screen and press the  lt   ENTER or INPUT button     Using the A V cursor buttons switches the mode for the template  Screen    Press the    cursor  or the ENTER  button to display the selected  template  and press the  lt  cursor button to close the displayed  Screen    The last selected template is displayed when the MY BUTTON  allocated to the TEMPLATE function is pressed    48      TEMPLATE TEST PATTERN    DOT LINE1  amp  DOT LINE2    DOT LINE3    g g  MAP2    MAP1    CIRCLE2    CIRCLE1  amp  DOT LINE4    You can turn a map upside down and scroll it horizontally when  MAP1 or MAP2 is selected  To invert or scroll the map 
259. ters in your computer are shown         Troubleshooting     B Are you sure that you want to turn on the network adapter     The screen is displayed in the case that the  selected network adapter is invalid  ost s rium s a    To turn it on  click the  Yes   and then proceed   to item 1 5     14     Not to turn it on  click the  No   and then the   Screen is back to the previous one to select   another network adapter  If no more adapter in   your computer  the    LiveViewer    will be closed        ye  w    Se      10    1 4 Selecting the network connection mode  continued     W A network connection was not established     The screen is displayed in the case that the  projector is not connected with a LAN cable  to your computer when the wired LAN is  selected     Be sure that the projector is connected with  a LAN cable to your computer        Click the  OK   then the screen is back to the previous one to select the network  connection mode     E Windows firewall is enabled  On    The screen is displayed in the case that       Windows firewall enabled  On      the firewall setting in Windows XP Vista is Are you sure you want to urbock viewer   activated  and the    LiveViewer    is blocked   Tm  by the firewall  NI      To turn it disabled  Off   click the  Yes       Not to turn it disabled  Off   click the   No   but the projector may not be able to  communicate with your computer through  the network     Yes No      If you put a check mark in the  Allow communication with L
260. the START  STOP  INTERVAL  and PLAY MODE are saved to    the Playlist     If the storage media is under the write protection or the    playlist txt    is the  read only type file  it is impossible to change the settings of the Slideshow        80    PC LESS Presentation  continued   Playlist    The Playlist is a DOS format text file  which decides the order of displayed still  image files in the Thumbnail or Slideshow    The playlist file name is    playlist txt    and it can be edited on a computer    It is created in the folder that contains the selected image files when the PC LESS  Presentation is started or the Slideshow is configured      Example of  playlist txt  files    START setting   STOP setting   INTERVAL setting   PLAY MODE setting    img001 jpg         img002 jpg 600        img003 jpg 700 rot1      img004 jpg     SKIP    img005 jpg 1000 rot2 SKIP     The  playlist txt  file contains the following information   Each piece of information requires to be separated by          and         at the end of each line   1st line  START  STOP  INTERVAL and PLAY MODE settings    180    2nd line and after  file name  interval time  rotation setting and skip setting   interval time  It can be set from 0 to 999900  ms  with an increment of 100  ms    rotation setting     rot1    means a rotation at 90 degrees clockwise   rot2  and   rot3  increase another 90 degrees in order   skip setting   SKIP  means that the image will not be displayed in the  Slideshow     NOTE   The maxi
261. the setting on the access point    2  f you use an encryption  you need to set it  Contact the network administrator  to check the encryption key that is set in the projector   The encryption key is always shown as  eee     3 To find the network setting on the projector  refer to the NOTE     122    4  f you use Subnet mask except Class A B C  please set it     21    1 5 Selecting the network connection method  continued     Wired LAN  1  Enter the following information for the    projector     Subnet mask  1  255 255 255 128   example     2  Click the  Connect      3  The network connection will be established   Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the  connection to your destination     130            1 If you use a Subnet mask other than Class A  B or C  this screen appears     NOTE   If you require the network setting information on the projector  take   the following procedure to find it out    1  Turn on the projector  and make sure that the projector image is on screen    2  Press the MENU button on the remote control or the A     lt   gt  buttons on  the projector to show the menu on screen    3  Use the A Y cursor buttons to select the Go to Advanced Menu     and use    the  gt  cursor button to enter the item    4  Use the A Y cursor buttons to select the NETWORK  and use the P   cursor  button to enter the item    5  Use the A    cursor buttons to select the INFORMATION  and push the     cursor button    6  The setting will be displayed in the NETWORK INFORMATION box    
262. those lights        Changing the frequency of remote control signal          The accessory remote control has the two choices on signal    _   frequency Mode 1 NORMAL and Mode 2 HIGH  If the remote control 6000   does not function properly  attempt to change the signal frequency  OQOQ   In order to set the Mode  please keep pressing the combination of iege s   two buttons listed below simultaneously for about 3 seconds  O COO    1  Set to Mode 1 NORMAL    VOLUME   and RESET buttons ad ODS        2  Set to Mode 2 HIGH    MAGNIFY OFF and ESC buttons V  Please remember that the REMOTE FREQ  in the SERVICE item of Q8     the OPTION menu  456  of the projector to be controlled should be SOS   set to the same mode as the remote control  Nee eu          Using as a simple PC mouse  amp  keyboard    The accessory remote control works as a simple mouse  and keyboard of the computer  when the projectors USB  TYPE B port and the computer   s type A USB port are  connected and MOUSE is selected for the USB TYPE B  item in the OPTION menu    357       1  PAGE UP key  Press PAGE UP button       2  PAGE DOWN key  Press PAGE DOWN button  7 EER   3  Mouse left button  Press ENTER button  USB t   4  Move pointer  Use the cursor buttons A  V  4 and  gt   por                            O   5  ESC key  Press ESC button  ig   6  Mouse right button  Press RESET button  O                NOTE   When the simple mouse  amp  keyboard function of this product does not  work correctly  please check the fol
263. ton  then press the    button     4  Point at the LAMP TIME using the V A button  then  press the  gt  button  A dialog will appear     5  Press the  gt  button to select    OK    on the dialog  It performs resetting the lamp time        ACAUTION PDo not touch any inner space of the projector  while the lamp  is taken out     NOTE   Please reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp   for a suitable indication about the lamp     13    Replacing the lamp  continued      HIGH VOLTAGE   A HIGH TEMPERATURE HIGH PRESSURE    ANWARNING PThe projector uses a high pressure mercury glass lamp  The  lamp can break with a loud bang  or burn out  if jolted or scratched  handled  while hot  or worn over time  Note that each lamp has a different lifetime  and  some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them  In addition  if the  bulb bursts  it is possible for shards of glass to fly into the lamp housing  and  for gas containing mercury and dust containing fine particles of glass to escape  from the projector   s vent holes    gt  About disposal of a lamp  This product contains a mercury lamp  do not put  it in a trash  Dispose of it in accordance with environmental laws     For lamp recycling  go to www lamprecycle org  in the US      For product disposal  consult your local government agency   or www eiae org  in the US  or www epsc ca  in Canada    For more information  ask your dealer          If the lamp should break  it will make a loud bang when it does    unp
264. tp   hitachi us digitalmedia or  http   www hitachidigitalmedia com     Refer to the manual for the application for instructions     To display the transferred image  select the MY IMAGE item in the NETWORK  menu  For more information  please see the description of the MY IMAGE item of  the NETWORK menu   EQNETWORK menu in User s Manual     Operating Guide     NOTE   It is possible to allocate the image file up to 4 in the maximum      Using MY BUTTON that registered MY IMAGE can display transferred image    LQOPTION menu in the User s Manual     Operating Guide      The image file also can be displayed by using schedule function from the web  browser  Refer to item 7 3 Event Scheduling    481  in detail        f you display MY IMAGE data on screen while you are using the USB Display  function  the application for the USB Display will be closed  To restart the  application  exit the MY IMAGE function  and then the software in the projector   LiveViewerLiteUSB exe  will run again    USB Display in the User s Manual      Operating Guide        70    4  My Image Function  Continued     Configure the following items from a web browser when MY IMAGE function is  used     Example  If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10   1  Enter  http   192 168 1 10   into the address bar of the web browser   2  Enter your user name and password  and then zm  click the  OK   T  3  Click the  Port Settings  on the main menu   4  Click the  Enable  check box to open the My  Image 
265. tton              2  Enter your user name and password  and then click the  OK      NOTE   The language used on the Web Control screen is the same as that  of the OSD on the projector  If you want to change it  you need to change the    OSD language on the projector   ECISCREEN menu in the User s Manual      Operating Guide        46    3 1 Logon  Continued     Below are the factory default settings for user name and password     User name Password             Administrator   blank      If you logon successfully  the screen below will be displayed     Main menu          3  Click the desired operation or configuration item on the main menu     47    3 2 Network Information       Displays the projector s current network configuration settings     Item Description  Projector Name Displays the projector name settings   DHCP Displays the DHCP configuration settings   IP Address Displays the current IP address   Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask   Default Gateway Displays the default gateway   DNS Server Address Displays the DNS server address   MAC Address Displays the ethernet MAC address                                   48    3 3 Network Settings       Displays and configures network settings     Item Description          IP Configuration Configures network settings    DHCP ON Enables DHCP    DHCP OFF Disables DHCP    IP Address Configures the IP address when DHCP is disabled   Subnet Mask Configures the subnet mask when DHCP is disabled   Default Gateway   Configures the de
266. ual of the security  tool           Security bar  Anti theft chain or wire    ANWARNING PDo not use the security bar and slot to prevent the projector  from falling down  since it is not designed for it     ANCAUTION     Do not place anti theft chain or wire near the exhaust vents   It may become too hot     NOTE     The security bar and slot is not comprehensive theft prevention  measures  It is intended to be used as supplemental theft prevention measure     REMA COMTO     Installing the batteries    Please insert the batteries into the remote control before using it  If the remote control  starts to malfunction  try to replace the batteries  If you will not use the remote control for  long period  remove the batteries from the remote control and store them in a safe place   1 Holding the hook part of the battery    cover  remove it   2 Align and insert the two AA batteries     HITACHI MAXELL  Part No LR6 or R6P   according to their plus and minus terminals  as indicated in the remote control   3 Replace the battery cover in the direction of the arrow and snap it back into place        ANWARNING    Always handle the batteries with care and use them only as  directed  Improper use may result in battery explosion  cracking or leakage   which could result in fire  injury and or pollution of the surrounding environment     Be sure to use only the batteries specified  Do not use batteries of different  types at the same time  Do not mix a new battery with used one      Make sure
267. uld not be established     Windows prevented network configuration  changes        Please insure that you are authored to make these changes or  Chock your security settings     You may log in the Windows under User  authority     Click the  OK  to return to the screen to  select the network connection mode     410     Consult to the network administrator and log in again under the Administrator  authority  After that  please resume at item 1 3 2 Starting the  LiveViewer     E119     1 4 Selecting the network connection mode  continued     E Are you sure you want to connect the selected projector        The message is appeared when the  wireless adapter you selected is already  used for another network connection     Aro you sur you want to connect the selected projector       To connect  click the  Yes   Proceed to  item 1 8 Confirming the connection to  your destination     30      Not to connect  click the  No  to return SS CN   to the screen to select the network   connection mode   410     13    1 5 Selecting the network connection method       There are some options to connect to the    Select the option that describes the connection method you would    network  tuk       Enter PassCodal    Enter PassCode B oriei  e Configure Manually               Select From List  Select one of them to meet your requirement  Fd       The PassCode  amp  a 12 49 code  that can be found on the Startup   Screen of the projector you are currently trying to connect to       Bxk   Not       
268. ure or tension to the  power cord and cables    If the power cord or cables is damaged  exposed or broken core wires  etc     contact your dealer      Do not place the projector or heavy objects on the power cord and cables   Also  do not place a spread  cover  etc  over them because this could result  in the inadvertent placing of heavy objects on the concealed power cord or  cables      Do not pull the power cord and cables  When connecting and  disconnecting the power cord or cables  do it with your hand holding the plug  or connector      Do not place the cord near the heater      Avoid bending the power cord sharply      Do not attempt to work on the power cord     Be careful in handling the battery of the remote control    Incorrect handling of the battery could result in fire or personal injury  The  battery may explode if not handled properly      Keep the battery away from children and pets  If swallowed consult a  physician immediately for emergency treatment      Do not allow the battery in a fire or water      Avoid fire or high temperature environment      Do not hold the battery with the metallic tweezers      Keep the battery in a dark  cool and dry play      Do not short circuit the battery      Do not recharge  disassemble or solder the battery      Do not give the battery a physical impact      Use only the battery specified in the other manual of this projector      Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading  the battery      
269. vailable for the  Network Presentation     1  Single PC mode  The projector displays images sent by one computer        43    2 2 Starting the Network Presentation  continued     2  Multi PC mode    The projector screen is divided to 4 zones  The projector displays images in  one zone sent by a computer  so that the projector can display images sent by  up to 4 computers at the same time                          2 2 2 Presenter mode    In the Single PC mode  the projector can be occupied by one computer and can  block an access from any other computer  if the Presenter mode is selected in the   LiveViewer     While making your presentation  you don t need to worry that the image on screen  is unexpectedly switched to an image sent by another computer    The Presenter mode can be set on the Option menu in the  LiveViewer  main  menu     141     2 2 3 Display User Name    A    User Name  can be input in the    LiveViewer     which is displayed on screen  by operating the menu on the projector  So  it can be found out whose image is  currently displayed on screen     241     44    32WwebiGontnol    You can adjust or control the projector via a network from a web browser on a  computer that is connected to the same network     NOTE   Internet Explorer 6 0 or later is required      f JavaScript is disabled in your web browser configuration  you must enable    JavaScript in order to use the projector web pages properly  See the Help files  for your web browser for details on how to
270. video tape recorder      Power off the projector after the computer or video tape recorder     Take care not to fatigue your eyes   Rest the eyes periodically     Set the sound volume at a suitable level to avoid bothering other people      t is better to keep the volume level low and close the windows at night to protect the  neighborhood environment     Connecting with notebook computer   When connecting with notebook computer  set to valid the RGB external image output   setting CRT display or simultaneous display of LCD and CRT     Please read instruction manual of the notebook for more information     Lamp    A WARNING Jn A    HIGH VOLTAGE HIGH TEMPERATURE HIGH PRESSURE       The projector uses a high pressure mercury glass lamp  The lamp can break with a  loud bang  or burn out  if jolted or scratched  handled while hot  or worn over time   Note that each lamp has a different lifetime  and some may burst or burn out soon after  you start using them  In addition  when the bulb bursts  it is possible for shards of  glass to fly into the lamp housing  and for gas containing mercury to escape from the  projector s vent holes           About disposal of a lamp   This product contains a mercury lamp  do not put in trash   Dispose of in accord with environmental laws    For lamp recycling  go to www lamprecycle org   in USA    For product disposal  contact your local government agency or www eiae org  in the US   or www epsc ca  in Canada     For more information  call your de
271. wing the user s manual        USB Display  continued     Right Click menu    The menu shown in the right will be displayed Display    when you right click the application icon in the    Windows notification area  Quit         za    A X 3 00PM    Display   The Floating menu is displayed  and the icon disappears from the  Windows notification area    Quit   The application is closed  and the icon disappears from the Windows  notification area     NOTE   If you wish to restart the application  you need to unplug the USB  cable and plug it again     Floating menu             C1  DS    If you select    Display    on the Right Click  menu  the Floating menu shown in the right  will appear on your computer screen     i  Ta  KO        Start capture button  The transmission to the projector is started  and the images will be displayed         Stop button  The image transmission is stopped      Hold button  The image on the projector s screen is temporally frozen  The last image before  the button is clicked is remained on the screen  You can revise the image data  on your computer without showing it on the projector s screen     Option button  The Options window is displayed   G Minimize button  The Floating menu is closed  and the icon reappears in the Windows notification  area     c      NOTE   If you click the Start capture button and or Stop button repeatedly   images may not be displayed on the screen     83    USB Display  continued     Options window    If you select the Optio
272. with the triangles  and  magnification ratio adjustment  with the magnifying glass icon     The magnification is automatically disabled when the displaying signal or its  display condition is changed    While the magnification is active  the keystone distortion condition may vary   It will be restored when the magnification is disabled    Some horizontal stripes might be visible on the image while magnification is  active    This function is not available in the following cases      The USB TYPE A port is selected as the input source      A sync signal in the range not supported is input      There is no input signal     Temporarily freezing the screen EBEESE DUE    1 Press the FREEZE button on the remote control      The    FREEZE    indication will appear on the screen  however   the indication will not appear when the OFF is selected for  the MESSAGE item in the SCREEN menu  LL46    and the  projector will go into the FREEZE mode  which the picture is  frozen    To exit the FREEZE mode and restore the screen to normal   press the FREEZE button again        e The projector automatically exits from the FREEZE mode when some control  buttons are pressed    e  f the projector continues projecting a still image for a long time  the LCD  panel might possibly be burned in  Do not leave the projector in the FREEZE  mode for too long    e Images might appear degraded when this function is operated  but it is not a  malfunction     Temporarily blanking the screen  BLANK button      
273. word and the screen will return to the  MyScreen PASSWORD on off menu  ENTER PASSWORD box  If an incorrect PASSWORD is input  the menu will  large   close  If necessary  repeat the process from 2 1     3 If you have forgotten your password   3 1 Follow the procedure in 1 1 to display the MyScreen PASSWORD on off  menu    3 2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box  large   The 10 digit  Inquiring Code will be displayed inside the box    3 3 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code  Your password will  be sent after your user registration information is confirmed         continued on next page     68    Description          PIN LOCK is a function which prevents the projector from being used unless  a registered Code is input     1 Turning on the PIN LOCK  1 1 Use the A Y buttons on the SECURITY menu to   select PIN LOCK and press the  gt  button or the   ENTER button to display the PIN LOCK on off   menu   1 2 Use the A Y buttons on the PIN LOCK on    off menu to select ON and the Enter PIN   Code box will be displayed   1 3 Input a 4 part PIN code using the A V 4 P    COMPUTER or INPUT button    The PIN Code again box will appear  Reenter   the same PIN code  This will complete the PIN   code registration       f there is no key input for about 55 seconds   while the Enter PIN Code box or the PIN Code again box is displayed    the menu will close  If necessary  repeat the process from 1 1   Afterwards  anytime the projector is restarted after AC power is turn
274. xe      6  fOO BE VOLUME  button  o OG           asumen OD       Use the VOLUME     VOLUME   buttons   VOLUME  button    to adjust the volume  OCO MUTE button  To have the projector silent  press the MUTE        ENGLISH                                  button on the remote control   Nery  3  Press the INPUT button on the projector  pe    Each time you press the button  the  projector switches its input port in turn   You can also use the remote control to INPUT button  select an input signal  Press the VIDEO  button for selecting an input signal from the  HDMI  COMPONENT  Y  Cb Pb  Cr Pr    S VIDEO or VIDEO port  or the COMPUTER  button for selecting an input signal from the  COMPUTER IN1  COMPUTER IN2  LAN   USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B port  ms MEME  Press the ASPECT button on the remote  990 COMPUTER button    control  Each time you press the button  IN OO ERR  the projector switches the mode for aspect leete  ratio in turn   Dj  Use the zoom ring to adjust the screen KA    size  BOS  6 Use the focus ring to focus the picture             Zoom ring  _ Focus ring             ANCAUTION    If you wish to have a blank screen while the projector s lamp is  on  use one of methods below      Use the supplied lens cover      Use the BLANK function  see  Operating Guide      Taking any other action may cause the damage on the projector     NOTE   The ASPECT button does not work when no proper signal is inputted     For the details of how to adjust the picture  please see  Operating Guid
275. y HAS 3010  Bracket for ceiling mount    HAS 204L  Fixing adaptor for low ceilings    Optional parts HAS 304H  Fixing adaptor for high ceilings    Laser remote control  RC R008   Soft case  CA3010     For more information  please consult your dealer                                   288mm                         18    Troubleshooting   Warranty and after service   If an abnormal operation  such as smoke  strange odor or excessive sound   should occur  stop using the projector immediately    Otherwise if a problem occurs with the projector  first refer to  Troubleshooting  of   Operating Guide  and  Network Guide   and run through the suggested checks   If this does not resolve the problem  please consult your dealer or service  company  They will tell you what warranty condition is applied        Please check the following web address where you may find the latest information  for this projector     Product    information and http   www hitachi us digitalmedia    Manuals      Production    information http   www hitachidigitalmedia com    Direct link to http   www hitachiserviceeu com support guides   manual download   userguides htm    NOTE   The information in this manual is subject to change without notice     The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in  this manual     The reproduction  transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not  permitted without express written consent     Trademark acknowledgment     Mac    Macintosh  a
276. y text data  ex  A     The PE is performed at  gym because today due    to bad weather     Messenger function requires an exclusive application for your computer  To edit   transfer and display the text data  use the application  You can download it from  the Hitachi web site  http   hitachi us digitalmedia or http  Awww hitachidigitalmedia   com   Refer to the manual for the application for the details of Messenger function  and instructions of the application     NOTE   It is possible to store the text data up to 12 in the maximum     Using MY BUTTON that registered MESSENGER can turn the displaying  messenger text on off   GQOPTION menu in the User s Manual     Operating    Guide     The text file also can be displayed by using schedule function via the web  browser  Refer to item 7 3 Event Scheduling    181  for the detail        72    5  Messenger Function  Continued     Configure the following items from a web browser when Messenger function is  used     Example  If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10   1  Enter  http   192 168 1 10   into the address bar of the web browser        2  Enter your user name and password  and then zm  click the  OK   T   3  Click the  Port Settings  on the main menu    4  Click the  Enable  check box to open the  Messenger Port  Port  9719   Click the   Enable  check box for the  Authentication   setting when authentication is required   otherwise clear the check box    5  Click the  Apply  button to save the settings    
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
Índice - Viega    Frigidaire FPCO06D7MS Product Specifications Sheet  Sanyo PLC-XC55  TKS - MKS - Calcert Instruments      Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file